SJ-20100603155704-008-ZXWR RNC (V3.09.30) Hardware Description - 322356

ZXWR RNC
Radio Network Controller
Hardware Description
Version:V3.09.30
ZTE CORPORATION
NO. 55, Hi-tech Road South, ShenZhen, P.R.China
Postcode: 518057
Tel: +86-755-26771900
Fax: +86-755-26770801
URL: http://ensupport.zte.com.cn
E-mail: support@zte.com.cn
LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright 2011 ZTE CORPORATION.
The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written
consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited.
Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by
contractual confidentiality obligations.

All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.
This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions
are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose,
title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the
use of or reliance on the information contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications
covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE
CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter
herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.
Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
R1.0
20100712
First Edition (V3.09.30.03)
R1.1
20100716
Update the information in shelf and front board such as changing

the GIPI4 to GIPI3
R1.2
20100804
Update size of Cabinete Appearance
R1.3
20100824
1. Add illustration, ability ,detailed function decripiton for the

following cards:
l
APBE
APBI
CLKG
DTB
EIPI
ET3A
GIPI
GLI
GUIM
ICM
ICMG
PSN
PWRD
RCB
ROMB
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
l
RUB
SBCX
SDTA
SDTB2
THUB
UIMC
2. Add Boards CPU Alarm Informations for the following cards:
R1.4
20100903
APBE
APBI
CLKG
DTB
EIPI
GIPI
GLI
GUIM
ICM
ICMG
IMAB
PSN
RCB
ROMB
RUB
SBCX
SDTA
SDTB
SDTB2
THUB
UIMC
The following sections have been added:

1. 6.19 PWRD Board
2. 12.1 Relationship between Shelf and Backplane
The following sections have been deleted:
1. 1.1 Relationship between Shelf and Backplane
2. 6.10 ET3A Board
3. 6.11 ET3I Board
4. 6.19 PEM Board
5. 7.15 RLIB Board
6. 9.7 E3/T3 Cables
The following sections have been modified:
1. 1.2 Definition
2. 1.3 Cabinet Appearance
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
3. 1.4 Cabinet Composition
4. 1.5 Cabinet Parameters and Descriptions
5. 2.5.8 Technical Parameters
6. 3.5 Parameters
7. 3.8.4 The Configuration Principle for the Gigabit Resource
Shelf Boards
8. 3.9.5 Typical Configuration
9. 4.3.2 Rear Board
10. 6.2 Interface Board Selection
11. 6.3 THUB Board
12. 6.3.1 APBE Board Definition
13. 6.3.5 Indicators
14. 6.3.12 APBE Board CUP Alarm Information
15. 6.4.1 APBI Board Definition
17. 6.4.12 APBI Board CUP Alarm Information
18. 6.5.1 CLKG Board Definition
20. 6.5.12 CLKG Board CUP Alarm Information
21. 6.6.1 DTA Board Definition
22. 6.6.4 DTA Board Panel Indicator
23. 6.6.11 DTA Board CUP Alarm Information
24. 6.7.1 DTB Board Definition
26. 6.7.12 DTB Board CUP Alarm Information
27. 6.8.1 DTI Board Definition
28. 6.8.4 DTI Board Panel Indicator
29. 6.9.1 EIPI Board Definition
31. 6.9.11 EIPI Board CUP Alarm Information
32. 6.12.1 GIPI Board Definition
34. 6.12.11 GIPI Board CUP Alarm Information
35. 6.13.1 GIPI3 Board Definition
36. 6.13.3 GIPI3 Board Panel Structure Diagram
37. 6.13.4 GIPI3 Board Panel Indicator
38. 6.13.6 GIPI3 board panel interface
39. 6.13.11 GIPI3 Board CUP Alarm Information
40. 6.14.1 GLI Board Definition
42. 6.14.11 GLI Board CUP Alarm Information
43. 6.15.1 GUIM Board Definition
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
45. 6.15.11 GUIM Board CUP Alarm Information
46. 6.16.1 ICM Board Definition
48. 6.16.13 ICM Board CUP Alarm Information
49. 6.17.1 ICMG Board Definition
51. 6.17.13 ICMG Board CUP Alarm Information
52. 6.18.1 IMAB Board Definition
54. 6.18.11 IMAB Board CUP Alarm Information
55. 6.20.1 POSI Board Definition
57. 6.21.1 PSN Board Definition
59. 6.21.10 PSN Board CUP Alarm Information
60. 6.22.1 RCB Board Definition
62. 6.22.12 RC Board CUP Alarm Information
63. 6.23.1 ROMB Board Definition
65. 6.23.12 ROMB Board CUP Alarm Information
66. 6.24.1 RUB Board Definition
68. 6.24.11 RUB Board CUP Alarm Information
69. 6.25.1 SBCX Board Definition
71. 6.25.12 SBCX Board CUP Alarm Information
72. 6.26.1 SDTA Board Definition
74. 6.26.11 SDTA Board CUP Alarm Information
75. 6.27.1 SDTA2 Board Definition
76. 6.27.4 SDTA2 Board Panel Indicator
77. 6.27.11 SDTA2 Board CUP Alarm Information
78. 6.28.1 SDTB2 Board Definition
80. 6.28.11 SDTB2 Board CUP Alarm Information
81. 6.29.1 SDTI Board Definition
82. 6.29.4 SDTI Board Panel Indicator
83. 6.29.11 SDTI Board CUP Alarm Information
84. 6.30.1 THUB Board Definition
86. 6.30.11 THUB Board CUP Alarm Information
87. 6.31.1 UIMC Board Definition
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
89. 6.31.11 UIMC Board CUP Alarm Information
90. 7.2.1 RCHB1 Board Definition
92. 7.4 RCKG1 Board
93. 7.5 RCKG2 Board
94. 7.6.1 RDTA Board Definition
95. 7.7.1 RDTB Board Definition
96. 7.8.1 RGER Board Definition
97. 7.9.1 RGIM1 Board Definition
98. 7.10.1 RGUM1 Board Definition
99. 7.11.1 RGUM2 Board Definition
100.7.13.1 RMNIC Board Definition
101.7.14 RSVB Board
102.7.15.1 RSVB Board Definition
103.7.16.1 RUIM2 Board Definition
104.7.17.1 RUIM3 Board Definition
105.11.1 ZXWR RNCA Typical Single Rack Configuration
Diagram
106.11.2 ZXWR RNC Double-Rack Full Configuration Diagram
107.11.3 ZXWR RNC Triple-Rack Full Configuration Diagram
108.12.1 Board Function Quick Index
109.12.3 Processor Quick Index
Other modifications
1. Sections 1.6.1.1 and 1.6.1.2 are combined into section 1.6.1,
Cabinet Door.
Rack.
Busbar.
4. Sections 3.9.5.1, 3.9.5.2, and 3.9.5.3 are combined into
section 3.9.5, Typical Configuration.
5. Section 6.25.9, Reliability, is re-ordered to be section 6.25.10;
while section 6.25.10, Configuration Requirements, is
re-ordered to be section 6.25.9.
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
R1.5
20100930
The following topics have been modified:

1. 6.9.10 Rear Board
4. 6.17.4 PWRD Board DIP Switches
5. 6.17.6 PWRD Board Interfaces
7. 6.19.10 PSN CPU Alarms
8. 6.20.2 Types and Functions
10. 6.21.2 Functions
11. 6.21.5 Buttons
R1.6
20101214

1. 6.10.6 Interfaces
2. 6.28.2 Functions
3. 11.4 Cable Connections for Single-Rack Configuration
4. 11.5 Cable Connections for Dual-Rack Configuration
5. 11.6 Cable Connections for Triple-Rack Configuration
6. 11.7 External Signal Cable Connections for Typical
Configurations
R1.7
20110106
The figure 1-3 Bottom View in 1.2 Cabinet Appearance has been
modified.
R2.0
20100920
Second Edition (V3.09.30.06)

The following chapter has been added:
1. 6.12 GIPI4
The following chapters or sections have been modified:
1. 3.3 Shelf Classification
2. 3.8.4 Configuration Principles
3. 6.2 Interface Board Selection
4. 6.6.8 DTA Board Configuration Requirement
5. 6.8.8 DTI Board Configuration Requirement
6. 6.11 GIPI3
7. 6.25.8 SDTA2 Board Configuration Requirement
8. 6.27.8 SDTI Board Configuration Requirement
9. 11.1 Typical Single Rack Configuration of ZXWR RNC
10. 12.2 Board Function Quick Index
11. 12.4 Processor Quick Index
Revision No.
Revision Date
Revision Reason
12. 12.5 A Quick Index for Function Board, PCB and Logic
Processor
13. 12.6 Front Board and Rear Board Relation Quick Index
R2.1
20101122

1. 2.7.1 Definition
2. 2.7.3 Structure
3. 3.1 Definition
4. 3.6.1 Definition
5. 4.3.3 Backplane
6. 4.3.4 Subcard
7. 5.3.2 ACT Description
8. 3.2 Types
9. 6 6.5.8 Backplane Connection
10. 6.7.6 DIP Switches and Jumpers
11. 6.9.2 Functions
14. 7.2.5 Configuration Requirements
R2.2
20101203
The following section has been modified:

2.7.3 Structure
R2.3
20101214

1. 6.10.6 Interfaces
2. 6.29.2 Functions
3. 11.4 Cable Connections for Single-Rack Configuration
4. 11.5 Cable Connections for Dual-Rack Configuration
5. 11.6 Cable Connections for Triple-Rack Configuration
6. 11.7 External Signal Cable Connections for Typical
Configurations
Serial Number: SJ-20100603155704-008

Publishing Date: 2010-12-03(R2.3)
Contents
Preface............................................................................................................. I
Chapter 1 Cabinet....................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Definition ........................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Cabinet Appearance........................................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Cabinet Composition .......................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Cabinet Parameter Description............................................................................ 1-4
1.5 Cabinet Compositions......................................................................................... 1-5
1.5.1 Cabinet Door ........................................................................................... 1-5
1.5.2 Rack........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.5.3 Busbar..................................................................................................... 1-7
Chapter 2 Subrack...................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Definition ........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Types ................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Layout ............................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4 Configurations.................................................................................................... 2-2
2.5 PDM Subrack..................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 2-3
2.5.2 Functions................................................................................................. 2-3
2.5.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 2-3
2.5.4 Panel....................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.5 Indicators................................................................................................. 2-4
2.5.6 Switches.................................................................................................. 2-5
2.5.7 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-5
2.5.8 Technical Parameters ............................................................................... 2-6
2.6 Fan Subrack ...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.6.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 2-6
2.6.2 Functions................................................................................................. 2-6
2.6.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 2-6
2.6.4 Panel....................................................................................................... 2-7
2.6.5 Indicators................................................................................................. 2-7
2.6.6 Buttons.................................................................................................... 2-7
2.6.7 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 2-8
2.7 Service Subrack ................................................................................................. 2-8

2.7.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 2-8
2.7.2 Functions................................................................................................. 2-8
2.7.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 2-8
2.8 Dustproof Subrack............................................................................................ 2-10
2.8.1 Definition ............................................................................................... 2-10
2.8.2 Structure................................................................................................ 2-10
2.8.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................. 2-10
Chapter 3 Shelf ........................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Definition ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Compositions ..................................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Shelf Classification ............................................................................................ 3-2
3.4 Configurations.................................................................................................... 3-3
3.5 Parameters ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.6 Control Shelf ...................................................................................................... 3-4
3.6.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 3-4
3.6.2 Functions................................................................................................. 3-5
3.6.3 Configuration Requirements...................................................................... 3-5
3.6.4 Board Configuration Principles .................................................................. 3-5
3.6.5 Typical Configuration ................................................................................ 3-6
3.6.6 Backplane................................................................................................ 3-7
3.7 Switching Shelf .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.7.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 3-7
3.7.2 Functions................................................................................................. 3-7
3.7.4 Board Configuration Principles .................................................................. 3-8
3.7.5 Typical Configuration ................................................................................ 3-8
3.7.6 Backplane................................................................................................ 3-9
3.8 Resource Shelf .................................................................................................. 3-9
3.8.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 3-9
3.8.2 Functions................................................................................................. 3-9
3.8.4 Configuration Principles ............................................................................ 3-9
3.8.5 Gigabit Resource Shelf Typical Configuration............................................3-11
3.8.6 Backplane.............................................................................................. 3-12
3.9 Interface Shelf.................................................................................................. 3-13
II
3.9.1 Difference between Interface Shelf and Resources Shelf in Iub Access ..... 3-13
3.9.2 Definition ............................................................................................... 3-13
3.9.3 Functions............................................................................................... 3-13
3.9.4 Board Configuration Principles ................................................................ 3-13
3.9.5 Typical GE Interface Shelf Configurations ................................................ 3-14
3.9.6 Backplane.............................................................................................. 3-16
Chapter 4 Board.......................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Definition ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Board Name ...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 Board Hardware Name ............................................................................. 4-1
4.2.2 Board Function Name............................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Board Types ...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.3.1 Front Board.............................................................................................. 4-2
4.3.2 Rear Board .............................................................................................. 4-2
4.3.3 Backplane................................................................................................ 4-2
4.3.4 Subcard................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 Board Assembly ................................................................................................. 4-2
4.5 Board Dimensions .............................................................................................. 4-3
Chapter 5 Indicators................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Types ................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 Status................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.3 Common Indicators ............................................................................................ 5-2
5.3.1 ENUM Description.................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2 ACT Description ....................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.3 Combination of RUN and ALM .................................................................. 5-2
Chapter 6 Front Boards ............................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Structure............................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Interface Board Selection ................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 APBE Board ...................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.1 APBE Board Definition ............................................................................. 6-4
6.3.2 Types ...................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Functions................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.4 Panel....................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.5 Indicators................................................................................................. 6-6
6.3.6 Buttons.................................................................................................... 6-7
6.3.7 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 6-7
6.3.8 Backplane Connection.............................................................................. 6-7
III

6.3.10 Reliability ............................................................................................... 6-9
6.3.11 Rear Board ............................................................................................ 6-9
6.3.12 APBE CPU Alarms ................................................................................. 6-9
6.4 APBI Board...................................................................................................... 6-10
6.4.1 APBI Board Definition ............................................................................ 6-10
6.4.2 Functions............................................................................................... 6-10
6.4.3 Difference between APBI Board Functions and APBI Board Functions....... 6-10
6.4.4 Panel......................................................................................................6-11
6.4.5 Indicators................................................................................................6-11
6.4.6 Buttons.................................................................................................. 6-12
6.4.7 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 6-12
6.4.8 Backplane Connection............................................................................ 6-13
6.4.9 Configuration Requirements.................................................................... 6-13
6.4.10 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-14
6.4.11 Rear Board .......................................................................................... 6-14
6.4.12 APBI CPU Alarms ................................................................................ 6-14
6.5 CLKG Board .................................................................................................... 6-14
6.5.1 CLKG Board Definition .......................................................................... 6-14
6.5.2 Functions............................................................................................... 6-15
6.5.3 Panel..................................................................................................... 6-16
6.5.4 Indicators............................................................................................... 6-16
6.5.5 Buttons.................................................................................................. 6-18
6.5.6 DIP Switches ......................................................................................... 6-18
6.5.7 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 6-19
6.5.10 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-21
6.5.11 Rear Board .......................................................................................... 6-21
6.5.12 CLKG CPU Alarms ............................................................................... 6-21
6.6 DTA Board ....................................................................................................... 6-22
6.6.1 DTA Board Definition ............................................................................. 6-22
6.6.2 DTA Board Function .............................................................................. 6-22
6.6.3 DTA board panel structure diagram ........................................................ 6-22
6.6.4 DTA Board Panel Indicator ..................................................................... 6-22
6.6.5 DTA Panel Key ...................................................................................... 6-23
6.6.6 DTA board's panel interface ................................................................... 6-24
IV
6.6.7 DTA Board Back Plane Connection ......................................................... 6-24

6.6.8 DTA Board Configuration Requirement ................................................... 6-24
6.6.9 DTA board reliablity ............................................................................... 6-24
6.6.10 DTA board's rear board ........................................................................ 6-25
6.6.11 DTA CPU Alarms.................................................................................. 6-25
6.7 DTB Board....................................................................................................... 6-25
6.7.1 DTB Board Definition ............................................................................. 6-25
6.7.2 Functions............................................................................................... 6-25
6.7.3 Panel..................................................................................................... 6-26
6.7.4 Indicators............................................................................................... 6-27
6.7.5 Buttons.................................................................................................. 6-27
6.7.6 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..................................................................... 6-27
6.7.7 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 6-29
6.7.10 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-30
6.7.11 Rear Board .......................................................................................... 6-30
6.7.12 DTB CPU Alarms ................................................................................. 6-30
6.8 DTI Board ........................................................................................................ 6-30
6.8.1 DTI Board Definition .............................................................................. 6-30
6.8.2 DTI Board Function ............................................................................... 6-30
6.8.3 DTI Board Panel Structure Diagram ........................................................ 6-30
6.8.4 DTI Board Panel Indicator ...................................................................... 6-31
6.8.5 DTI Board Panel Key ............................................................................. 6-32
6.8.6 DTI board's panel interface .................................................................... 6-33
6.8.7 DTI Board Back Plane Connection .......................................................... 6-33
6.8.8 DTI Board Configuration Requirement .................................................... 6-33
6.8.9 DTI board reliablity ................................................................................ 6-33
6.8.10 DTI board's rear board ......................................................................... 6-33
6.9 EIPI Board ....................................................................................................... 6-34
6.9.1 EIPI Board Definition ............................................................................. 6-34
6.9.2 Functions............................................................................................... 6-34
6.9.3 Panel..................................................................................................... 6-34
6.9.4 Indicators............................................................................................... 6-35
6.9.5 Buttons.................................................................................................. 6-35
6.9.6 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 6-36

6.9.9 Reliability ............................................................................................... 6-37
6.9.10 Rear Board .......................................................................................... 6-37
6.9.11 EIPI CPU Alarms .................................................................................. 6-37
6.10 GIPI Board..................................................................................................... 6-37
6.10.1 GIPI Board Definition ........................................................................... 6-37
6.10.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-37
6.10.3 GIPI Board Panel ................................................................................. 6-38
6.10.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-39
6.10.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-40
6.10.6 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-40
6.10.7 Backplane Connection .......................................................................... 6-40
6.10.8 Configuration Requirements.................................................................. 6-41
6.10.9 GIPI Board Reliability............................................................................ 6-41
6.10.10 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-41
6.10.11 GIPI CPU Alarms................................................................................ 6-41
6.11 GIPI3 ............................................................................................................. 6-42
6.11.1 GIPI3 Board Definition .......................................................................... 6-42
6.11.2 GIPI3 Board Functions.......................................................................... 6-42
6.11.3 GIPI3 Board Panel................................................................................ 6-42
6.11.4 Indicators ............................................................................................. 6-43
6.11.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-44
6.11.6 Interfaces ............................................................................................. 6-44
6.11.8 Configuration Requirements .................................................................. 6-44
6.11.9 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-45
6.11.10 Rear Board......................................................................................... 6-45
6.11.11 GIPI3 CPU Alarms .............................................................................. 6-45
6.12 GIPI4............................................................................................................. 6-46
6.12.1 GIPI4 Board Definition .......................................................................... 6-46
6.12.2 GIPI4 Board Functions.......................................................................... 6-46
6.12.3 GIPI4 Board Panel ............................................................................... 6-46
6.12.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-47
6.12.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-48
6.12.6 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-48
VI
6.12.9 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-49

6.12.10 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-49
6.12.11 GIPI4 CPU Alarms .............................................................................. 6-49
6.13 GLI Board ...................................................................................................... 6-50
6.13.1 GLI Board Definition ............................................................................ 6-50
6.13.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-50
6.13.3 Panel................................................................................................... 6-51
6.13.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-51
6.13.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-52
6.13.6 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-52
6.13.9 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-53
6.13.10 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-54
6.13.11 GLI CPU Alarms ................................................................................. 6-54
6.14 GUIM Board................................................................................................... 6-54
6.14.1 GUIM Board Definition ......................................................................... 6-54
6.14.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-54
6.14.3 Panel................................................................................................... 6-55
6.14.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-56
6.14.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-58
6.14.6 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-58
6.14.9 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-59
6.14.10 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-59
6.14.11 GUIM CPU Alarms.............................................................................. 6-59
6.15 ICM Board ..................................................................................................... 6-60
6.15.1 ICM Board Definition ............................................................................ 6-60
6.15.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-60
6.15.3 Difference between ICM Board and CLKG/ICMG Board.......................... 6-61
6.15.4 Panel................................................................................................... 6-61
6.15.5 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-62
6.15.6 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-64
6.15.7 DIP Switches ....................................................................................... 6-65
6.15.8 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-66
VII
6.15.10 Configuration Requirements ................................................................ 6-66

6.15.11 Reliability ........................................................................................... 6-66
6.15.12 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-66
6.15.13 ICM CPU Alarms ................................................................................ 6-67
6.16 ICMG Board................................................................................................... 6-67
6.16.1 ICMG Board Definition ......................................................................... 6-67
6.16.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-67
6.16.3 Difference between CLKG Board and ICMG Board ................................. 6-68
6.16.4 Panel................................................................................................... 6-68
6.16.5 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-69
6.16.6 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-71
6.16.7 DIP Switches ....................................................................................... 6-71
6.16.8 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-72
6.16.10 Configuration Requirements ................................................................ 6-73
6.16.11 Reliability ........................................................................................... 6-73
6.16.12 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-73
6.16.13 ICMG CPU Alarms ............................................................................. 6-73
6.17 IMAB Board ................................................................................................... 6-74
6.17.1 IMAB Board Definition .......................................................................... 6-74
6.17.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-74
6.17.3 Panel................................................................................................... 6-74
6.17.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-75
6.17.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-75
6.17.6 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-76
6.17.9 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-76
6.17.10 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-77
6.17.11 IMAB CPU Alarms .............................................................................. 6-77
6.18 PWRD Board ................................................................................................. 6-77
6.18.1 PWRD Board Definition ........................................................................ 6-77
6.18.2 PWRD Board Functions ........................................................................ 6-77
6.18.3 PWRD Board Panel.............................................................................. 6-78
6.18.4 PWRD Board DIP Switches................................................................... 6-78
6.18.5 PWRD Board Jumper ........................................................................... 6-79
6.18.6 PWRD Board Interfaces........................................................................ 6-79
VIII
6.18.7 PWRD Board Configuration Requirements ............................................. 6-80

6.19 POSI Board ................................................................................................... 6-80
6.19.1 POSI Board Definition .......................................................................... 6-80
6.19.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-81
6.19.3 Panel................................................................................................... 6-81
6.19.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-81
6.19.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-82
6.19.6 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-82
6.19.9 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-83
6.19.10 Rear Board ........................................................................................ 6-83
6.20 PSN Board..................................................................................................... 6-83
6.20.1 PSN Board Definition ........................................................................... 6-83
6.20.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-83
6.20.3 Panel................................................................................................... 6-84
6.20.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-85
6.20.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-85
6.20.6 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-86
6.20.8 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-86
6.20.9 Rear Board .......................................................................................... 6-86
6.20.10 PSN CPU Alarms ............................................................................... 6-86
6.21 RCB Board .................................................................................................... 6-87
6.21.1 RCB Board Definition ........................................................................... 6-87
6.21.2 Types and Functions............................................................................. 6-87
6.21.3 Panel................................................................................................... 6-88
6.21.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-89
6.21.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-90
6.21.6 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................... 6-90
6.21.7 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-92
6.21.10 Reliability ........................................................................................... 6-93
6.21.11 Rear Board......................................................................................... 6-93
6.21.12 RCB CPU Alarms ............................................................................... 6-93
6.22 ROMB Board ................................................................................................. 6-93
IX
6.22.1 ROMB Board Definition ........................................................................ 6-93

6.22.2 Functions............................................................................................. 6-94
6.22.3 Panel................................................................................................... 6-94
6.22.4 Indicators............................................................................................. 6-95
6.22.5 Buttons ................................................................................................ 6-96
6.22.6 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................... 6-97
6.22.7 Interfaces............................................................................................. 6-98
6.22.10 Reliability ........................................................................................... 6-99
6.22.11 Rear Board......................................................................................... 6-99
6.22.12 ROMB CPU Alarms ............................................................................ 6-99
6.23 RUB Board ...................................................................................................6-100
6.23.1 RUB Board Definition ..........................................................................6-100
6.23.2 Functions............................................................................................6-100
6.23.3 Types .................................................................................................6-102
6.23.4 Panel..................................................................................................6-102
6.23.5 Indicators............................................................................................6-103
6.23.6 Buttons ...............................................................................................6-103
6.23.7 Interfaces............................................................................................6-104
6.23.8 Configuration Requirements.................................................................6-104
6.23.9 Reliability ............................................................................................6-105
6.23.10 Rear Board .......................................................................................6-105
6.23.11 RUB CPU Alarms ..............................................................................6-105
6.24 SBCX Board .................................................................................................6-106
6.24.1 SBCX Board Definition ........................................................................6-106
6.24.2 Functions............................................................................................6-106
6.24.3 Indices................................................................................................6-107
6.24.4 Panel..................................................................................................6-107
6.24.5 Indicators............................................................................................6-108
6.24.6 Buttons ...............................................................................................6-109
6.24.7 SBCX Board Interfaces........................................................................ 6-110
6.24.8 Backplane Connection ......................................................................... 6-110
6.24.9 Configuration Requirements................................................................. 6-110
6.24.10 Reliability .......................................................................................... 6-111
6.24.11 Rear Board........................................................................................ 6-111
6.24.12 SBCX CPU Alarms ............................................................................ 6-111
6.25 SDTA Board.................................................................................................. 6-112

6.25.1 SDTA Board Definition ........................................................................ 6-112
6.25.2 Function ............................................................................................. 6-112
6.25.3 Panel.................................................................................................. 6-112
6.25.4 Indicators............................................................................................ 6-113
6.25.5 Buttons ............................................................................................... 6-114
6.25.6 Interface ............................................................................................. 6-114
6.25.7 Backplane Connection ......................................................................... 6-114
6.25.8 Configuration Requirements................................................................. 6-114
6.25.9 Reliability ............................................................................................ 6-115
6.25.10 Rear Board ....................................................................................... 6-115
6.25.11 SDTA CPU Alarms............................................................................. 6-115
6.26 SDTA2 Board ................................................................................................ 6-115
6.26.1 SDTA2 Board Definition ...................................................................... 6-115
6.26.2 SDTA2 Board Function ....................................................................... 6-115
6.26.3 SDTA2 Board Panel Structure Diagram ................................................ 6-116
6.26.4 SDTA2 Board Panel Indicator .............................................................. 6-116
6.26.5 SDTA2 Board Panel Keys .................................................................... 6-117
6.26.6 SDTA2 Board Panel Interface .............................................................. 6-117
6.26.7 SDTA2 Board Back Plane Connection .................................................. 6-117
6.26.8 SDTA2 Board Configuration Requirement ............................................ 6-118
6.26.9 SDTA2 Board Reliability ...................................................................... 6-118
6.26.10 The rear board of the SDTA2 board .................................................... 6-118
6.26.11 SDTA2 CPU Alarms ........................................................................... 6-118
6.27 SDTB2 Board................................................................................................ 6-119
6.27.1 SDTB2 Board Definition ...................................................................... 6-119
6.27.2 Functions............................................................................................ 6-119
6.27.3 Panel..................................................................................................6-120
6.27.4 Indicators............................................................................................6-121
6.27.5 Buttons ...............................................................................................6-122
6.27.6 Interfaces............................................................................................6-122
6.27.7 Backplane Connection .........................................................................6-122
6.27.9 Reliability ............................................................................................6-123
6.27.10 Rear Board .......................................................................................6-123
6.27.11 SDTB2 CPU Alarms...........................................................................6-123
6.28 SDTI Board ...................................................................................................6-123
XI
6.28.1 SDTI Board Definition .........................................................................6-123

6.28.2 SDTI Board Function ..........................................................................6-124
6.28.3 SDTI Board Panel Structure Diagram ...................................................6-124
6.28.4 SDTI Board Panel Indicator .................................................................6-124
6.28.5 SDTI Board Panel Keys .......................................................................6-125
6.28.6 SDTI Board Panel Interface .................................................................6-125
6.28.7 SDTI Board Back Plane Connection .....................................................6-126
6.28.8 SDTI Board Configuration Requirement ................................................6-126
6.28.9 SDTI Board Reliability .........................................................................6-126
6.28.10 The Rear Board of the SDTI Board .....................................................6-126
6.28.11 SDTI CPU Alarms..............................................................................6-126
6.29 THUB Board .................................................................................................6-127
6.29.1 THUB Board Definition ........................................................................6-127
6.29.2 Functions............................................................................................6-127
6.29.3 Panel..................................................................................................6-128
6.29.4 Indicators............................................................................................6-129
6.29.5 Buttons ...............................................................................................6-130
6.29.6 Interfaces............................................................................................6-130
6.29.9 Reliability ............................................................................................6-131
6.29.10 Rear Board .......................................................................................6-131
6.29.11 THUB CPU Alarms ............................................................................6-131
6.30 UIMC Board ..................................................................................................6-132
6.30.1 UIMC Board Definition ........................................................................6-132
6.30.2 Functions............................................................................................6-132
6.30.3 Panel..................................................................................................6-133
6.30.4 Indicators............................................................................................6-133
6.30.5 Buttons ...............................................................................................6-134
6.30.6 Interfaces............................................................................................6-134
6.30.9 Reliability ............................................................................................6-135
6.30.10 Rear Board .......................................................................................6-135
6.30.11 UIMC CPU Alarms .............................................................................6-136
Chapter 7 Rear Boards............................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Rear Board Structure.......................................................................................... 7-1
XII
7.2 RCHB1 Board .................................................................................................... 7-2

7.2.1 RCHB1 Board Definition .......................................................................... 7-2
7.2.2 Functions................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.4 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 7-3
7.2.6 Front Board.............................................................................................. 7-4
7.3 RCHB2 Board .................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.1 RCHB2 Board Definition .......................................................................... 7-4
7.3.2 Functions................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.3 Panel....................................................................................................... 7-4
7.3.4 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 7-5
7.3.6 Front Board.............................................................................................. 7-6
7.4 RCKG1 Board.................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4.1 RCKG1 Board Definition .......................................................................... 7-6
7.4.2 Functions................................................................................................. 7-6
7.4.3 Panel....................................................................................................... 7-6
7.4.4 Interfaces ................................................................................................ 7-7
7.4.6 Front Board.............................................................................................. 7-8
7.5 RCKG2 Board.................................................................................................... 7-8
7.5.1 RCKG2 Board Definition .......................................................................... 7-8
7.5.2 Functions................................................................................................. 7-9
7.5.3 Panel....................................................................................................... 7-9
7.5.4 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 7-10
7.5.6 Front Board............................................................................................ 7-10
7.6 RDTA Board .....................................................................................................7-11
7.6.1 RDTA Board Definition ............................................................................7-11
7.6.2 RDTA Board Function .............................................................................7-11
7.6.3 RDTA panel structure diagram ................................................................7-11
7.6.4 RDTA Board Panel Interface ...................................................................7-11
7.6.5 RDTA Board Jumper ............................................................................. 7-12
7.6.6 RDTA Board Configuration Requirement ................................................. 7-12
7.6.7 RDTA board's front board ....................................................................... 7-12
7.7 RDTB Board .................................................................................................... 7-12
XIII
7.7.1 RDTB Board Definition .......................................................................... 7-12

7.7.2 Function ................................................................................................ 7-12
7.7.3 Panel..................................................................................................... 7-13
7.7.4 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 7-13
7.7.5 Jumpers ................................................................................................ 7-14
7.7.7 Front Board............................................................................................ 7-15
7.8 RGER Board.................................................................................................... 7-15
7.8.1 RGER Board Definition .......................................................................... 7-15
7.8.2 Functions............................................................................................... 7-15
7.8.3 Panel..................................................................................................... 7-15
7.8.4 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 7-16
7.8.6 Front Board............................................................................................ 7-17
7.9 RGIM1 Board................................................................................................... 7-17
7.9.1 RGIM1 Board Definition ......................................................................... 7-17
7.9.2 Functions............................................................................................... 7-17
7.9.3 Panel..................................................................................................... 7-17
7.9.4 Interfaces .............................................................................................. 7-18
7.9.6 Front Board............................................................................................ 7-19
7.10 RGUM1 Board ............................................................................................... 7-19
7.10.1 RGUM1 Board Definition ...................................................................... 7-19
7.10.2 Functions............................................................................................. 7-19
7.10.3 Panel................................................................................................... 7-19
7.10.4 Interfaces............................................................................................. 7-20
7.10.6 Front Board.......................................................................................... 7-21
7.11 RGUM2 Board................................................................................................ 7-21
7.11.1 RGUM2 Board Definition ...................................................................... 7-21
7.11.2 Functions ............................................................................................. 7-21
7.11.3 Panel ................................................................................................... 7-21
7.11.4 Interfaces ............................................................................................. 7-22
7.11.5 Configuration Requirements .................................................................. 7-23
7.11.6 Front Board .......................................................................................... 7-23
7.12 RMNIC Board................................................................................................. 7-23
7.12.1 RMNIC Board Definition ....................................................................... 7-23
XIV
7.12.2 Functions............................................................................................. 7-23

7.12.3 Panel................................................................................................... 7-23
7.12.4 Interfaces............................................................................................. 7-24
7.12.6 Front Board.......................................................................................... 7-25
7.13 RMPB Board.................................................................................................. 7-25
7.13.1 RMPB Board Definition ........................................................................ 7-25
7.13.2 Functions............................................................................................. 7-25
7.13.3 Panel................................................................................................... 7-25
7.13.4 Interfaces............................................................................................. 7-26
7.13.6 Front Board.......................................................................................... 7-27
7.14 RSVB Board .................................................................................................. 7-27
7.14.1 RSVB Board Definition ......................................................................... 7-27
7.14.2 Functions............................................................................................. 7-27
7.14.3 Panel................................................................................................... 7-27
7.14.4 Interfaces............................................................................................. 7-28
7.14.6 Front Board.......................................................................................... 7-29
7.15 RUIM2 Board ................................................................................................. 7-29
7.15.1 RUIM2 Board Definition ....................................................................... 7-29
7.15.2 Functions............................................................................................. 7-29
7.15.3 Panel................................................................................................... 7-30
7.15.4 Interfaces............................................................................................. 7-30
7.15.6 Front Board.......................................................................................... 7-31
7.16 RUIM3 Board ................................................................................................. 7-31
7.16.1 RUIM3 Board Definition ....................................................................... 7-31
7.16.2 Functions............................................................................................. 7-31
7.16.3 Panel................................................................................................... 7-32
7.16.4 Interfaces............................................................................................. 7-32
7.16.6 Front Board.......................................................................................... 7-33
Chapter 8 Backplane .................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Definition ........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Function ............................................................................................................ 8-1
8.3 Structure............................................................................................................ 8-1
XV
8.4 Relation of Shelf and Backplane.......................................................................... 8-2

8.5 BCTC Board ...................................................................................................... 8-2
8.5.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 8-2
8.5.2 Functions................................................................................................. 8-2
8.5.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 8-3
8.5.4 Power Supply Interface............................................................................. 8-3
8.5.5 Jumpers and Switches.............................................................................. 8-4
8.5.6 Configuration Requirements ..................................................................... 8-4
8.5.7 Shelf Type ............................................................................................... 8-4
8.6 BGSN Board ...................................................................................................... 8-4
8.6.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 8-4
8.6.2 Functions................................................................................................. 8-5
8.6.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 8-5
8.6.4 Power Interface........................................................................................ 8-5
8.6.5 Jumpers Switches .................................................................................... 8-6
8.6.7 Corresponding Shelf Type......................................................................... 8-6
8.7 BPSN ................................................................................................................ 8-7
8.7.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 8-7
8.7.2 Functions................................................................................................. 8-7
8.7.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 8-7
8.7.4 Power Supply Interface............................................................................. 8-7
8.7.5 Jumpers Switches .................................................................................... 8-8
8.7.7 Corresponding Shelf Type......................................................................... 8-8
8.8 RBID Board ....................................................................................................... 8-9
8.8.1 Definition ................................................................................................. 8-9
8.8.2 Functions................................................................................................. 8-9
8.8.3 Structure.................................................................................................. 8-9
8.8.4 Jumpers and Switches.............................................................................. 8-9
8.8.5 Configuration Method ............................................................................ 8-10
Chapter 9 Cables ........................................................................................ 9-1

9.1 RNC Cable Introduction ..................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Power Cables .................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.1 The Classification of the Cabinet Power Cable .......................................... 9-1
9.2.2 External Power Cable .............................................................................. 9-2
9.2.3 Internal Power Cables .............................................................................. 9-3
XVI
9.3 Cabinet Grounding Cable ................................................................................... 9-6

9.4 Clock Cables ..................................................................................................... 9-6
9.4.1 Clock Cable Classification ........................................................................ 9-6
9.4.2 Line Clock Cable ..................................................................................... 9-6
9.4.3 BITS Clock Cable .................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.4 System Clock Distribution Cable ............................................................... 9-9
9.5 Ethernet Cables ............................................................................................... 9-12
9.5.1 Ethernet cable classification ................................................................... 9-12
9.5.2 THUB Cable ......................................................................................... 9-12
9.5.3 Shielded Straigt-Through Cable .............................................................. 9-15
9.6 E1/T1 Cables ................................................................................................... 9-16
9.6.1 E1/T1 cable classification ....................................................................... 9-16
9.6.2 External E1 Cable (75) ......................................................................... 9-17
9.6.3 External E1 Cable (120) ....................................................................... 9-19
9.6.4 External T1 Cable (100 Unshielded) ..................................................... 9-20
9.6.5 External T1 Cable (100 Shielded) ........................................................ 9-22
9.7 Monitor Cables................................................................................................. 9-23
9.7.1 Monitor Cable Classification ................................................................... 9-23
9.7.2 Environment Monitor Adaptor Cable ....................................................... 9-23
9.7.3 Rack Front/Rear Door Access Control Cable ........................................... 9-25
9.7.4 Machine Room Access Control Sensor Cable ......................................... 9-26
9.7.5 IR Sensor Cable .................................................................................... 9-27
9.7.6 Smoke Sensor Cable ............................................................................. 9-28
9.7.7 H/T Sensor Cable .................................................................................. 9-28
9.8 Single Mode Fiber Optics ................................................................................. 9-29
Chapter 10 Other Devices and Accessories .......................................... 10-1

10.1 GPS Active Antenna and Lightening Arrester ................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Model .................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Functions............................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.3 Connections......................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.4 Technical Parameters ........................................................................... 10-2
10.2 Alarm Box ...................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.1 Composition of the Alarm System.......................................................... 10-3
10.2.2 Alarm Box Function .............................................................................. 10-4
10.2.3 Technical Specifications ........................................................................ 10-5
Chapter 11 System Configuration Description ...................................... 11-1

11.1 Typical Single Rack Configuration of ZXWR RNC ..............................................11-1
XVII
11.2 Double-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC..................................................11-2

11.3 Triple-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC ....................................................11-3
11.4 Cable Connections for Single-Rack Configuration ..............................................11-4
11.5 Cable Connections for Dual-Rack Configuration ................................................11-6
11.6 Cable Connections for Triple-Rack Configuration ...............................................11-9
11.7 External Signal Cable Connections for Typical Configurations .......................... 11-17
11.8 External Equipment and Accessories .............................................................. 11-18
Chapter 12 Hardware Quick Reference .................................................. 12-1

12.1 Relationship between Shelf and Backplane ...................................................... 12-1
12.2 Board Function Quick Index ........................................................................... 12-1
12.3 Board Hardware (PCB) Quick Index ................................................................ 12-4
12.4 Processor Quick Index ................................................................................... 12-6
12.5 A Quick Index for Function Board, PCB and Logic Processor ........................... 12-7
12.6 Front Board and Rear Board Relation Quick Index ........................................... 12-8
12.7 Apparatus Legends Quick Reference............................................................... 12-9
Figures............................................................................................................. I
Tables ...........................................................................................................VII
Glossary ...................................................................................................... XV
XVIII
Preface
Purpose
Thank you very much for choosing the UMTS wireless access system of ZTE Corporation!
The UMTS wireless access system of ZTE is a 3G mobile communication system
developed on a basis of the UMTS technology. It features strong capability in CS and
PS service processing and provides diversified services. Compared with GSM, UMTS
delivers a wider range of telecommunication services, including such multimedia services
as voice, data, and image transmission, with higher rate and resource utilization ratio.
ZXWR RNC, a new generation radio network controller in the ZTE UMTS V3 family,
delivers functions of system access control, security mode control, mobility management,
and radio resource management and control, etc.
ZXWR RNC provides all the functions defined in the 3GPP R99/R4/R5/R6/R7 protocol,
and offers Iu, Iub, and Iur series standard interfaces, which enable it to connect with CNs,
RNCs, and Node Bs from different manufacturers.
Developed on a basis of ZTE all IP unified hardware platform, ZXWR RNC features
a distributed design, separating control plane and user plane as well as interface and
application. It supports ATM/IP dual protocol stack and can smoothly evolve to full IP
UTRAN.
What is in This Manual

This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter
Chapter 1, Cabinet
Summary
Introduces the appearance, parameter, structure, connection and
technical structure of ZXWR RNC cabinet.
Chapter 2, Subrack
Introduces the function, structure, panel and technical parameters

of ZXWR RNC subrack.
Chapter 3, Shelf
Introduces the function classification, configuration, structure,

backplane and parameter of ZXWR RNC shelf, as well as the
appearance, principle, backplane design and configuration
requirements of the shelf.
Chapter 4, Board
Introduces name, classification and signal flow of ZXWR RNC

board. It details all boards on functional unit, including board
function and principle, LED indicators, buttons, DIP switches, and
interfaces on the front board, rear board and backplane, as well
as the configuration requirements of each board.
Chapter 5, Indicators
Introduces the LED indicators on the front board.
Chapter
Summary
Chapter 6, Front Boards
Introduces the front boards of ZXWR RNC.
Chapter 7, Rear Boards
Introduces the rear boards of ZXWR RNC.
Chapter 8, Backplane
Introduces the functions, classifications, and configurations of

ZXWR RNC backplane.
Chapter 9, Other Devices and
Introduces the switch, GPS antenna lightening arrester, GPS
Accessories
antenna, including their model, function, connection, front/rear

board, and configuration requirements.
Chapter 10, System
Introduces the hardware resource configuration of ZXWR RNC
Configuration Description
and details the typical configurations.
Appendix A, Hardware Quick
Give a quick reference of ZXWR RNC hardware.
Reference
Intended Audience
l
l
System engineer
Maintenance engineer
II
Chapter 1
Cabinet
Table of Contents
Definition ....................................................................................................................1-1
Cabinet Appearance...................................................................................................1-1
Cabinet Composition ..................................................................................................1-4
Cabinet Parameter Description...................................................................................1-4
Cabinet Compositions ................................................................................................1-5
1.1 Definition
The cabinet refers to a box with doors that can be opened and closed, having shelves and
subracks inside.
With a modular design, the cabinet integrates the power supply subrack, dust-proof
subrack, fan subrack, and service subrack, and features good strength, rigidity, heat
dissipation, electromagnetic compatibility, and interchangability. It is easy to install and
maintain, and is flexible in capacity expansion and amount adjustment. The cabinet will
not loose, deform, or damage in normal loading, storage, and transportation.
1.2 Cabinet Appearance

The appearance of ZXWR RNC cabinet is shown in Figure 1-1.
1-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
ZTE Proprietary and Confidential
ZXWR RNC Hardware Description
Figure 1-1 Physical Appearance
The dimensions in the

drawing are in mm.
The top view of the cabinet is shown in Figure 1-2.
1-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 1 Cabinet
Figure 1-2 Top View
1. Cable Cover Board

2. PE Grounding Point
3. Plastic Cover Board
4. Top Wiring Slot

5. Rear Cable Outlet
6. Top Fan Cover Board
7. Front Wire Outlet
The bottom view of the cabinet is shown in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3 Bottom View
1. Cable Cover Board

2. PE Grounding Point
3. Plastic Cover Board

4. Rear Cable Outlet
5. Dust Mesh
6. Front Wire Outlet
1-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
1.3 Cabinet Composition

The components of a cabinet (including the top) are shown in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 Cabinet Components
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Front Door
Top Plate
Rack
Top Wiring Slot
Connecting Board
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Top Frame Assembly

Top Side Plate
Right Plate
Side Door
Decorative Side Plate
11. Filter
12. Supporting Pin
13. Decorative Plate
1.4 Cabinet Parameter Description

The parameters related to the cabinet are shown in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF CABINET
Parameter
Description
Design standard
CompactPCI
Dimensions
2,000 mm 650 mm 800 mm (H W D)
1-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 1 Cabinet
Parameter
Description
Color
Black front door, with fine ventilation holes.

Blue cabinet painting.
Weight
About 350 kg (including boards, shelves and

cabinet in full configuration)
Power supply
-57 V DC~-40 V DC
Power consumption
9,700 W at most (3-cabinet full configuration and

five resource shelves configuration)
Applicable surroundings
Temperature range: 0C~+40C

Humidity range: 20%~90%
EMC shield
When the frequency is between 30 MHz~1 GHz,

the minimum shielding is 40 dB.
Ventilation and heat dissipation
Dissipating the heat by both blowing inside and

exhausting fans at the top of the cabinet.
Air enters the rack mainly from the ventilation
hole at the bottom of the front/rear door and the
bottom of the cabinet. Dustproof measures are
taken at all ventilation holes.
There are a group of fans at the top of the rack.
They are used for internal ventilation.
1.5 Cabinet Compositions

1.5.1 Cabinet Door
The cabinet is equipped with a front door and a rear door that can be opened and closed,
and has two removable side doors. The front door and the rear door have the same
structure, with dense ventilation holes, which can keep good heat dissipation.
The structure of the front/rear door is shown in Figure 1-5.
1-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 1-5 STRUCTURE OF FRONT/REAR DOOR
1. Dustproof filter
2. Door board
3. Lock
1.5.2 Rack
The rack consists of top shelf, bottom shelf, column, adjusting rail, and side doors.
The structure of the rack is shown in Figure 1-6.
1-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 1 Cabinet
Figure 1-6 STRUCTURE OF RACK
1. Top shelf
2. Column
3. Adjusting rail
4. Side door
5. Bottom shelf
1.5.3 Busbar
The busbar is designed for ZXWR RNC rack to make networking easier and more flexible.
The power supply and the grounding of the system are all connected through the busbar.
The structure of the busbar is shown in Figure 1-7.
1-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 1-7 STRUCTURE OF BUSBAR
The busbar is on the right of the cabinet back, providing six terminal blocks.
1. From top down, terminal blocks 1 and 6 provide four connecting terminals, as listed
below:
l -48 V
l -48 VGND
l PE
l GND
2. Terminal block 1 connects with the PDM, providing power supply for the busbar.
3. Terminal block 6 only provides power supply for the Fan subrack 3.
4. Terminal blocks 2, 3, 4 and 5 provide power supply for fan subracks and service
subracks.
From top down, these terminal blocks provide six connecting terminals, as listed below:
l
l
l
l
l
l
-48 V
-48 RTN
-48 V
-48 RTN
PGND
PGND
1-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 2
Subrack
Table of Contents
Definition ....................................................................................................................2-1
Types .........................................................................................................................2-1
Layout ........................................................................................................................2-1
Configurations ............................................................................................................2-2
PDM Subrack .............................................................................................................2-3
Fan Subrack...............................................................................................................2-6
Service Subrack .........................................................................................................2-8
Dustproof Subrack....................................................................................................2-10
2.1 Definition
Subracks are used to combine all boards and parts into an independent functional unit,
providing a good running environment for all units.
2.2 Types
ZXWR RNC subracks include the following types:
l
l
l
l
PDM subrack
Fan subrack
Dustproof subrack
Service subrack (on the Layer 4 shelf)
2.3 Layout
The layout of all ZXWR RNC subracks in the cabinet is as shown in Figure 2-1.
2-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 2-1 SUBRACK LAYOUT
1. PDM subrack
2. Fan subrack
3. 1 U dummy panel
4. Service subrack
5. Dustproof subrack
2.4 Configurations
The maximum configurations of a single ZXWR RNC cabinet are as shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 SUBRACK CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CABINET
Subrack
Layer
Layer Height
PDM
Layer 1
2U
Fan subrack
Layer 3
1U
Service subrack
Layer 4
9U
Dummy panel
Layer 1
1U
Max configuration for a single cabinet: 42 U = (1 2 + 3 1 + 4 9 + 1 1) U
2-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 2 Subrack
Other corresponding modules are configured in the cabinet, such as, the filter for cabinet power inle
ad, busbar, rear horizontal cabling management support and dustproof subrack. 42 U refers to the
valid space inside the cabinet, excluding the dustproof subrack and the whole cabinet frame.
Note:
1 U is a unit for height. 1 U = 1.75 inch + 4.445 mm (1 inch = 25.4 mm).
2.5 PDM Subrack

2.5.1 Definition
PDM subrack locates at the utmost top of the cabinet, providing the power supply for the
whole cabinet.
2.5.2 Functions
The PDM subrack performs the following functions:
1. Distributing the power supply for all shelves inside the rack
2. Performing the automatic switchover for the two channels of external input power
supply and performing the dual backup of the power supply
3. PWRD and PWRDB (the rear board of PWRD) inside PDM indicate the power supply,
monitor the environment and monitor the internal fan subrack
2.5.3 Structure
The structure of the PDM subrack is as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 STRUCTURE OF PDM SUBRACK
1. Connection terminal
2. Lightening arrester
3. PWRDB
4. Outer frame
5. Heat sink of the isolating
secondary pipe
6. Isolating secondary pipe

7. PWRD board
8. Switch
PDM subrack is generally used as subrack module.

The connection terminal locates on the back of the frame. The rear cover cannot be
uncovered and it must be equipped with energy security protection. There installs PWRD
2-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
on the front panel of the subrack, for monitoring. The front panel can turn outwards 90
around the axis, which bring the convenience for the subrack maintenance and repair.
When the equipment is running normally, the front door is fixed on the frame with the
captive fasteners.
2.5.4 Panel
The structure of the PDM subrack panel is as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 PANEL OF PDM SUBRACK
2.5.5 Indicators
There are eight LED indicators on the front panel of PDM subrack, as shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 LED INDICATOR ON PDM PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running LED indicator
Flashing at 1 Hz:
Normal
OFF: Abnormal
-48 V (I)
Red
48 V alarm on the first

channel
ON: -48 V
under/over-voltage
on the first channel
OFF: No alarms
-48 V (II)
Red
48 V alarm on the
second channel
ON: -48 v
under/over-voltage
on the second channel
OFF: No alarms
FAN
Red
Fan alarm
ON: Abnormal
OFF: No alarms
HOT
Red
Temperature alarm
ON: Abnormal
OFF: No alarms
2-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 2 Subrack
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
SMOKE
Red
Smoke alarm
ON: Abnormal
OFF: No alarms
DOOR
Red
Door control alarm
ON: Abnormal
OFF: No alarms
ARRESTER
Red
Lightening arrester
ON: Abnormal
alarm
OFF: No alarms
2.5.6 Switches
There are two switches on the front panel of the PDM subrack, as shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 SWITCH ON PDM PANEL
Switch
Description
-48 V (I) power supply input
Down: Switch OFF

Up: Switch ON
-48 V (II) power supply input
Down: Switch OFF

Up: Switch ON
2.5.7 Interfaces
The power distribution of the system and the input/output cable of the monitoring system
are all connected on the back side of the rack through the PDM subrack. The interfaces
are as shown in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 INTERFACE ON PDM PANEL
Interface
Description
RS485 (Up)
Connected to PD485 on the rear board of ROMB

Connected to RS485 (UP) on PDM of the
RS485 (Down)
adjacent rack
SENSORS
Connecting to the sensor cable
DOOR
Connecting the door control cable
FANBO X1
Connected to the cabinet-top fan set
FANBO X2
Connected to the fan subrack on Layer 1
FANBO X3
FANBO X4
ARRESTER
Connected to the lightening arrester
INPUT (I)
Power supply input

2-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Interface
Description
INPUT (II)
Power supply input
OUTPUT
Power supply output
2.5.8 Technical Parameters

The technical parameters of the PDM subrack are shown in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF PDM
Parameter
Description
Dimensions
88.1 mm 482.6 mm 374 mm (H W D)

(excluding the extrusive part of the connection
terminal at the back)
Weight
5.4 kg
2.6 Fan Subrack

2.6.1 Definition
Except for the cabinet-top fans, there installs one fan subrack above Layer 1 shelf, Layer
3 shelf and the dustproof subrack respectively.
2.6.2 Functions
The fan subrack is generally used as fan subrack module. It can monitor and adjust the
speed automatically. There install three sets of unit modules inside each fan subrack, with
two fans in each set. All the fans support mixed insertion. It is very convenient to maintain
on the site and replace with hot line. All the fans work simultaneously to form an enclosed
air channel (in at the bottom and out at the top) in the whole cabinet, to cool the cabinet
by force.
2.6.3 Structure
The structure of the fan subrack is as shown in Figure 2-4.
2-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 2 Subrack
Figure 2-4 STRUCTURE OF FAN SUBRACK
2.6.4 Panel
The structure of the fan subrack panel is as shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 PANEL OF FAN SUBRACK
1. Monitor
2. Power supply socket
2.6.5 Indicators
There are six LED indicators on the front panel of the fan subrack. There are two LED
indicators for each fan set, three fans in each set. The LED indicators are as shown in
Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 LED INDICATOR ON FAN SUBRACK PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running LED indicator
ON: Abnormal
OFF: No alarms
ALM
Red
Alarm LED indicator
ON: Abnormal
OFF: No alarms
2.6.6 Buttons
There is one button on the front panel of each fan set. Press down the button to unplug
the corresponding fan set.
2-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
2.6.7 Interfaces
The interfaces are as shown in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 INTERFACE ON FAN SUBRACK PANEL
Interface
Description
RS485
Connected to FANBOX1-4 of PDM
POWR
Power supply switch

The technical parameters of the fan subrack are as shown in Table 2-8.
Table 2-8 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF FAN SUBRACK
Parameter
Description
Dimensions
43.6 mm 482.6 mm 400 mm (H W D)
Weight
7 kg
2.7 Service Subrack

2.7.1 Definition
A service subrack refers to a plug-in unit that combines functional boards through its slots
to provide some certain services. Service subracks are installed in the four shelves of a
cabinet.
2.7.2 Functions
The service subrack can perform different services by installing different backplanes.
Shelves fall into the control shelf, resource shelf, interface shelf and switching shelf. The
four types of shelves work together to implement the ZXWR RNC functions.
2.7.3 Structure
The structure of a service subrack is shown in Figure 2-6.
2-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 2 Subrack
Figure 2-6 STRUCTURE OF SERVICE SUBRACK
The sectional view of a service subrack is shown in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 SECTIONAL VIEW OF SERVICE SUBRACK
The service subrack is in a shielded structure that is formed by front and rear boards. It has
17 slots in the front and in the back respectively, and each slot is 431.8 mm deep. Fibers
are led from the panels of the front boards and other cables from the panels of the rear
boards. DIP switches are used to set the type and version information of the backplanes
installed in the shelf.

The technical parameters of the service subrack are as shown in Table 2-9.
2-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 2-9 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF SERVICE SUBRACK

Parameter
Front board
Description
Subrack height
8U
Dimensions
322.25 mm 340 mm 25.4

mm (H W D)
Rear board
Subrack height
6U
Dimensions
233.35 mm 100 mm 25.4

mm (H W D)
Number of slots
17
Space between slots
25.4 mm
Space of subrack
431.8 mm
Embedded cabling subrack
1U
2.8 Dustproof Subrack

2.8.1 Definition
The dustproof subrack locates at the bottom of the cabinet and it can be fixed on the
cabinet.
There installs a built-in filtering net inside the dustproof, which is washable and easy to
maintain.
2.8.2 Structure
The structure of the dustproof subrack is as shown in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 STRUCTURE OF DUSTPROOF SUBRACK

The technical parameters of the dustproof subrack are as shown in Table 2-10.
2-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 2 Subrack
Table 2-10 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF DUSTPROOF SUBRACK

Parameter
Description
Dimensions
21.8 mm 482.6 mm 460 mm (H W D)
Weight
0.7 kg
2-11
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
This page intentionally left blank.
2-12
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3
Shelf
Table of Contents
Definition ....................................................................................................................3-1
Compositions .............................................................................................................3-1
Shelf Classification ....................................................................................................3-2
Configurations ............................................................................................................3-3
Parameters ................................................................................................................3-4
Control Shelf ..............................................................................................................3-4
Switching Shelf...........................................................................................................3-7
Resource Shelf...........................................................................................................3-9
Interface Shelf ..........................................................................................................3-13
3.1 Definition
A shelf is an independent functional unit that consists of boards and backplanes and
provides a good environment for these boards.
3.2 Compositions
The shelf consists of the subrack, front board assembly, and the rear board assembly, as
shown in Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1 COMPOSITIONS OF SHELF
1. Front board assembly
2. Subrack
3. Rear board assembly
3-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
3.3 Shelf Classification

ZXWR RNC The shelves in the system are classified into the following types according to
their functions. Control Shelf, Handover Shelf, Resource Shelf (Gigabit Resource Shelf),
Interface Shelf (Gigabit Interface Shelf).
In the system, based on the shelf back plane type, the shelves include: BCTC, BGSN
and BPSN. By different configurations, those shelves set up RNC systems with different
features. The boards available are shown in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Shelf Classification Explanation
Shelf Type
Back Plane Type
Function
The Boards
Explanation
Available
The control shelf
Control Shelf
BCTC
performs the sys-
SBCX,
tem control plane
CLKG/ICMG/ICM,
signaling process-
RCB,
ing, O&M and the
UIMC
ROMB,
THUB,
clock function.
The
handover
shelf is the core

handover
sub-
system of ZXWR
RNC. It provides
Handover Shelf
BPSN
a message transmission
channel
GLI, PSN, UIMC,

SBCX
for the functional

entities inside or
outside the system.
The Gigabit resource shelf proResource Shelf
Gigabit Resource
Shelf
vides a user plane

BGSN
processing
pool,
as well as the Iu,

Iur and Iub interface.
APBE,
GIPI,
GIPI3,
GIPI4,
SDTA,
SDTA2,
ET3I, SDTI, DTA,

DTI, GUIM, RUB,
EIPI, DTB, IMAB,
APBI,
ET3A,
POSI
3-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3 Shelf
Shelf Type
Back Plane Type
Function
The Boards
Explanation
Available
The Gigabit interface shelf applies

to the Iub port access only. It proInterface Shelf
Gigabit Interface
Shelf
BGSN
vides the ATM access over Iub port

and the IP ac-
DTB,
SDTB2,
SDTB,
APBI,
IMAB, EIPI
cess over Iub port

(lower speed IP
interface).
3.4 Configurations
According to the access mode, ZXWR RNC shelves fall into with low-speed interface shelf
and without low-speed interface shelf.
The rack configurations with the low-speed interface shelf is as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 ZXWR RNC CABINET CONFIGURATION (WITH LOW-SPEED INTERFACE
SHELF)
The rack configurations without the low-speed interface shelf is as shown in Figure 3-3.
3-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 3-3 CABINET CONFIGURATION (WITHOUT LOW-SPEED INTERFACE SHELF)
3.5 Parameters
The technical parameters related to the shelf are shown in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF SHELF
Parameter
Description
Design standards
IEC297
Dimensions
19 inch wide and 8 U high
Capacity
17 standard board slots on one shelf
Structure
The backplane slot is on the back of the shelf. The front and rear boards
are vertical to the backplane and they are inserted in opposite positions.
Cabling mode
The fiber is led out from the front panel of the front board and other cables
are led out from the rear board.
Validation and heat
The wind enters from the lower part of the cabinet and goes out from
dissipation
the upper part of the cabinet. It dissipates the heat by force to meet the
requirements of validation and heat dissipation.
Monitoring
Infrared, smog, humidity and temperature alarm
Power consumption
1,650 W for full configuration of a single shelf.

3,200 W for full configuration of a single rack.
3.6 Control Shelf

3.6.1 Definition
A control shelf is an RNC shelf that processes control-plane signaling, performs system
operation and maintenance, and provides global clock.
3-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3 Shelf
3.6.2 Functions
l
l
l
Operates and maintains the system

Deals with the control plane signalling
Provides the global clock
3.6.3 Configuration Requirements

The control shelf with ROMB locates on L2 on Rack 1. Other control shelves can be
configured on any place on the rack.
3.6.4 Board Configuration Principles

The configuration principles of all boards on the control shelf are as shown in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3 CONFIGURATION PRINCIPLES OF CONTROL SHELF
S.N.
Board
Qty.
Suppor
Recommended
ted Slot
Slot
Configuration Principles
Front board
Obliged to be configured on the control
1
ROMB
1~2
11~12
Slot 11~12 on
shelf 2 on Rack 1 and not required for
Control shelf 1 on
other control shelf.
Cabinet 1
At least one is obligatory (Slot 11) and two

for M/S configuration.
Ascending from left to right.
RCB
1~14
1~8,
11~16
Slot 1~8 on the
At least one is obligatory and two are
control shelf where
configured in pairs on neighboring slots
ROMB locates.
(left odd right even) to support the M/S
Slot 1~8 or 11~16 on
configuration. Such as, 3~4, and so on.
other control shelf.
Otherwise, configure on odd slots, such

as, 3, 5.
Not required on other control shelf.
CLKG/ICM
G/ICM
Slot 13~14 on the

1~2
13~14
control shelf where

ROMB locates
At least one is obligatory (recommended

on Slot 13) and two for M/S configuration.
Configure ICMG to support AGPS.
Configure ICM to support GPS.
Otherwise, configure CLKG.
THUB
1~2
15~16
Slot 15~16 on the
control shelf where
ROMB locates
At most two are configured.
9~10

5
UIMC
1~2
9~10
At most two can be configured.
3-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
S.N.
Board
Qty.
Suppor
Recommended
ted Slot
Slot
At most three can be configured, one for
logs and two for OMM.
SBCX
1~3
1, 3, 5, 7
1, 3, 5
Three SBCX boards are required when

there is only one control shelf. Otherwise,
configure one on Control shelf 1.
Rear board
1
RUIM2
Obligatory
RUIM3
10
10
Obligatory
Slot 11~12 on the

3
RMPB
1~2
11~12
control shelf where

ROMB locates
Same as ROMB and the slot to locate

must correspond to ROMB.
Slot 13 on the control

4
RCKG1
13
shelf where ROMB
Obligatory
locates
5
RCKG2
14
shelf where ROMB
Obligatory
locates
6
RCHB1
15
shelf where the
Obligatory
ROMB locates
7
RCHB2
16
shelf where ROMB
Obligatory
locates
On Control shelf 1,
8
RSVB
1~3
1, 3, 5
3, 5 where ROMB
Configured with SBCX.
locates
3.6.5 Typical Configuration

By default, the control shelves on the master rack (Rack 1) and other racks are as shown
in Figure 3-4.
3-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3 Shelf
Figure 3-4 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL SHELF (SINGLE SHELF)
3.6.6 Backplane
The backplane of the control shelf is BCTC.
3.7 Switching Shelf

3.7.1 Definition
The switching shelf is the core switching subsystem of ZXWR RNC, providing necessary
message transport channel between internal/external functional units.
3.7.2 Functions
The switching shelf is to perform the data interaction, including timing, signaling, voice
service and data service.
The switching shelf provides the level-1 IP switching platform for the system, for the
interconnection of multiple resource shelves with the interface shelf, and the expansion
of user planes between resource shelves.
3-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)

The switching shelf is not required to configure when there are one or two resource
shelves on ZXWR RNC. Otherwise, the switching shelf is required to configure, for the
interconnection and expansion of the resource shelf.
The switching shelf can locate at any place on the cabinet, and usually, it locates on Layer
4 on Cabinet 2.

The boards that can be configured on the switching shelf and how to configure are as
shown in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 CONFIGURATION PRINCIPLES ON SWITCHING SHELF
S.N.
Board
Qty.
PSN
1~2
Supported
Recommended
Slot
Slot
7~8
7~8
Front board
At least one is required (recommended on
1
Slot 7) and two are required to support the

load sharing.
Configured in pairs on neighboring slots
GLI
1~10
1~6, 9~14
5~6, 9~14
(left odd right even) to support the load

sharing, such as, 1~2, 3~4, and so one.
Otherwise, configure on odd slot, such as,
1, 3, 5.
SBCX
1~2
1, 3
1, 3
Two are configured to serve as OMM.
UIMC
1~2
15~16
15~16
RUIM2
Obligatory
RUIM3
10
10
Obligatory when there configure two UIMC.
RSVB
1~2
1, 3
1, 3
Configured with SBCX.
At least one is required (slot 15) and two

are required to support M/S configuration.
Rear board
3.7.5 Typical Configuration

The full configurations of the switching shelves are as shown in Figure 3-5.
3-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3 Shelf
Figure 3-5 FULL CONFIGURATION OF SWITCHING SHELF
3.7.6 Backplane
The backplane of the switching shelf is BPSN.
3.8 Resource Shelf

3.8.1 Definition
The resource shelf is one type of ZXWR RNC shelf. It provides the user plane processing
pool and Iu/Iur/Iub interfaces.
3.8.2 Functions
The resource shelf performs the following functions:
l
l
l
l
User plane protocol processing, Gateway, and interface bottom-layer processing

IP access (high-speed IP) and ATM access through Iu interface
IP access (high-speed IP) and ATM access through Iub interface
IP access (high-speed IP) and ATM access through Iur interface. At present, Iur
interface and Iu interface have the same access mode.

There are no specific configuration requirements for the resource shelf. Usually, it locates
on L1, L3 and L4.
3.8.4 Configuration Principles

The configuration principles of the boards on the Gigabit resource shelf are shown in Table
3-5.
3-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 3-5 Configuration Principles of Gigabit Resource Shelf Boards
SN
Board
Num-
Available
ber
Slot
Recommended
Configuration Principle
Slot
Front Board
RUB
1-10
2-8, 11-16
2, 4-8, 11-16
APBE
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
Configured from left to right

Configured from left to right, it can mix with GIPI3, GIPI4,
SDTA2, DTI, DTA, and SDTI and applies to ATM over
Iu only. It does not apply to the IP over Iu.
GIPI
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
GIPI3
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
GIPI4
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
SDTA
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
SDTA2
SDTI
It applies to IP interface over Iux, and is configured from left

to right. It can mix with APBE, SDTA2, DTI, DTA, and SDTI.
Configured from left to right, it can mix with APBE,
GIPI3, GIPI4, DTI, DTA, and SDTI.
GIPI3, GIPI4, DTI, DTA, and SDTI.
GIPI3, GIPI4, SDTA2, DTI, and DTA.
DTA
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
GIPI3, GIPI4, SDTA2, DTI, SDTI. For the convenience of

maintenance, it is not recommended to use 3 neighboring
slots (no exception when mixing with DTI).
Configured from left to right, it can mix with APBE, GIPI3,
10
DTI
0-14
1-8, 11-17
1-8, 11-17
GIPI4, SDTA2, DTA, SDTI. For the convenience of

maintenance, it is not recommended to use 3 neighboring
slots (no exception when mixing with DTA).
At least one GUIM board should be configured and
11
GUIM
1-2
9-10
9-10
it is recommended to insert the board into slot 9. In

active/standy configuration, two GUIM boards are needed.
Rear Board
3-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3 Shelf
SN
Board
Num-
Available
ber
Slot
Recommended
Configuration Principle
Slot
It applies to the ATM connection between RNC and CN.
RGIM1
0-2
1-8, 11-17
The rear slot
At most two RGIM1 boards should be configured to the
correspond-
RNC system. When only one APBE connects to the Iu
ing to the
Iu-interface
APBE
interface, only one RGIM1 is needed.

It is not needed if the system uses BITS or GPS clock
reference, or if Iu interfaces are connected through IP
network.
It is configured in the same way as GIPI, GIPI3, or
RGER
0-14
1-8, 11-17
GIPI4. The slot must correspond to GIPI, GIPI3, or
1-8, 11-17
GIPI4. It is configured when the system provides

GE electrical interface externally.
RMNIC
RGUM1
RGUM2
1-8
1-8, 11-17
1-5, 11-12,
17
It is configured in the same way as GIPI. The slot must

correspond to GIPI. It is configured when the system
provide FE electrical interface externally.
Mandatory
10
10
Mandatory
3.8.5 Gigabit Resource Shelf Typical Configuration

The gigabit resource shelf typical configuration is shown below:
1. The typical configuration of the gigabit resource shelf of ATM over Iu is shown in Figure
3-6.
Figure 3-6 Gigabit Resource Shelf Typical Configuration for ATM Access over Iu
3-11
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
2. The typical configuration of the gigabit resource shelf for IP over Iu with GIPI board is
Figure 3-7 Gigabit Resource Shelf Typical Configuration for IP over Iu
3. The typical configuration of the gigabit resource shelf for IP over Iu with ATM CSTM-1
configuration is shown in Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8 Gigabit Resource Shelf Configuration for IP over Iu, ATM CSTM-1 over
Iub
3.8.6 Backplane
The backplane of the 1 G resource shelf is BGSN.
3-12
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3 Shelf
3.9 Interface Shelf

3.9.1 Difference between Interface Shelf and Resources Shelf in
Iub Access
The interface shelf and the resource shelf can both provide the access through Iub
interface.
l
l
When the access mode is the high-speed IP interface (only supporting Ethernet at
present) at Iub interface, Iub interface is directly connected to the resource shelf.
When the access mode is ATM or IP low-speed interface at Iub interface, the interface
shelf provides the access to the system and the service data. This data is then sent
to the resource shelf for processing through the switching shelf.
3.9.2 Definition
The interface shelf is one type of ZXWR RNC shelf. It is only used for access through Iub
interface.
3.9.3 Functions
The interface shelf performs the following functions:
l
l
ATM access through Iub interface

IP access through Iub interface (IP low-speed interface)
Note:
When the physical layer is E1/T1/CSTM-1 and the upper-layer is IP, it is called the
low-speed IP access.
High-speed IP access refers to IP over Ethernet.

When the Iub interface adopts the high-speed interface (Ethernet or ATM STM-1/CSTM-1)
access mode, the services are accessed to the resource shelf directly through Iub
interface. Otherwise, when the Iub interface adopts ATM or IP low-speed interface access
mode, the services are accessed to the system through the interface shelf.
The service data is sent to the resource shelf for processing through the switching shelf.
1 G interface shelf functional boards include SDTB, DTB, SDTB2, APBI, IMAB and EIPI.
The typical configuration of the interface shelf is as shown in Table 3-6.
3-13
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 3-6 CONFIGURATION PRINCIPLES OF INTERFACE SHELF

S.N.
Board
Qty.
Supported
Recom-
Slot
mended Slot
Front board
2
APBI
0~7
1~8, 11~17
3, 6, 11~17
Ascending from right to left.
EIPI
0~7
1~8, 11~17
3, 6, 11~17
Ascending from right to left.
DTB
0~10
1~8, 11~14,
1~2, 4~5, 7~8,
17
11~12, 14, 17
SDTB2
0~8
1~8, 11~17
1~8
RDTB
0~10
1~8, 11~14,
1~2, 4~5, 7~8,
Same as DTB and the slot must
17
11~12, 14, 17
correspond to DTB
Rear board
1
Configured when the system

provides the external E1/T1
interface
2
RGUM1
Obligatory
RGUM2
10
10
Obligatory
3.9.5 Typical GE Interface Shelf Configurations

The interface shelf configuration can be classified into three typical types by access mode
at different interfaces.
1. Typical configuration in full E1 access mode
In full E1 access mode, the system can support at most 320 E1s, 155/320 ATM/IP Node
Bs. The number of ATM Node Bs is limited by 31 APBI (instead of EIPI) IMA groups.
DTB boards are placed at a certain interval in groups of two for the convenience of
maintenance.
3-14
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 3 Shelf
Figure 3-9 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in Full E1 ACCESS MODE
2. Typical configuration in full CSTM-1 access mode. It consists of the following two
types.
l Full ATM CSTM-1 access mode
In full ATM CSTM-1 access mode, the system can support at most 30 CSTM-1s
(1890 E1s) and 900 Node Bs. Adjacent slots support the cross-backup of IMA
groups.
Figure 3-10 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in FULL ATM CSTM-1 ACCESS MODE
Full IP CSTM-1 access mode

In full IP CSTM-1 access mode, the system can support at most 441 E1s and 441
IP Mode Bs.
Two SDTB2 boards can be inserted into two adjacent slots of slots 1-8 in 1+1
backup mode, with the odd-numbered slot in the left and the even-numbered slot
in the right. Otherwise, only one board can be inserted into each pair of slots.
3-15
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Limited by the number of EIPI slots, four SDTB2 boards can be inserted into one
shelf, but these boards only provide seven optical interfaces.
Figure 3-11 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in Full IP CSTM-1 ACCESS MODE
3. Typical configuration in full STM-1 access mode

In full STM-1 access mode, the system can support at most 60 STM-1s (without
backup). Two APBE boards can be inserted into two adjacent slots in the 1:1 backup
mode, with the odd-numbered slot in the left and the even-numbered slot in the right.
Alternatively, APBE boards can be configured without backup.
Figure 3-12 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in FULL STM-1 ACCESS MODE
3.9.6 Backplane
The backplane of the 1 G interface shelf is BGSN.
3-16
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 4
Board
Table of Contents
Definition ....................................................................................................................4-1
Board Name ...............................................................................................................4-1
Board Types...............................................................................................................4-1
Board Assembly .........................................................................................................4-2
Board Dimensions ......................................................................................................4-3
4.1 Definition
In ZXWR RNC, a board refers to an integrated circuit board that can fulfill a specific
function.
4.2 Board Name

One board has two names:
1. Board hardware name
2. Board function name
The board hardware name and the board function name are related to each other.
4.2.1 Board Hardware Name

The board hardware name is also called the PCB name.
The board hardware name is the name for the board hardware designing and production
purpose. It is the physical a printed circuit board.
4.2.2 Board Function Name

The board function name is used for software design and used after the software uploading.
It is a functional printed circuit board.
The name on the board panel is the board function name.
After loading different software versions, a same PCB board can perform different
functions.
4.3 Board Types

On the hardware assembly, the boards fall into:
4-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
l
l
l
l
Front board
Rear board
backplane
Subcard
4.3.1 Front Board

The front board is the board with the front panel inserted in the shelf slot. There install the
LED indicators on the front panel, indicating the board running status.
4.3.2 Rear Board

The rear board works with the front board, leading out the external signal interface (the
fiber is led out from the front panel of the front board) and the debugging interface between
different shelves on same rack or between different racks. For some M/S front boards, it
is necessary to configure them with two types of rear boards.
The front board and the rear board form a complete metal shield inside the shelf, greatly
reducing electromagnetic radiation, and enhancing anti-interference capability and system
reliability.
4.3.3 Backplane
A backplane refers to a board that provides slots for front and rear boards to connect
inter-board signals in a subrack.
4.3.4 Subcard
A subcard is a module that is used on front boards to perform independent common
functions.
4.4 Board Assembly

The board assembly is as shown in Figure 4-1.
Figure 4-1 BOARD ASSEMBLY RELATION
1. Front board panel
2. Front board
3. Backplane
4-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 4 Board
4. Slot
5. Rear board
6. Rear board panel
4.5 Board Dimensions

The board dimensions are as shown in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 BOARD DIMENSIONS
Parameter
Description
Front board dimensions
The height of PCB board complies with CompactPCI standard.

322.25 mm 340 mm 2 mm (H W D)
Rear board dimensions
233.35 mm 100 mm 2 mm (H W D)
Backplane dimensions
444 mm 351 mm 4 mm (H W D)
4-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
4-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 5
Indicators
Table of Contents
Types .........................................................................................................................5-1
Status.........................................................................................................................5-1
Common Indicators ....................................................................................................5-2
5.1 Types
In ZXWR RNC, the LED indicators on the board panel fall into the following two types.
1. Common LED indicators
The common LED indicators exist on most boards, including:
l ENUM
l RUN
l ALM
l ACT
2. Special LED indicators
Except for the common LED indicators, different boards have their special LED
indicators.
5.2 Status
The status of the LED indicators on the board panel are as shown in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 STATUS OF LED INDICATOR ON BOARD PANEL
Type
Status
Description
Constantly ON
The LED indicator is constantly ON at a specific status.
Constantly OFF
The LED indicator is constantly OFF at a specific status.
Flashing at 5 Hz
The period is 0.2 second and the vacant period ratio is 50%: ON for 0.1
second and OFF for 0.1 second.
Flashing at 2 Hz
The period is 0.5 second and the vacant period ratio is 50%: ON for
0.25 second and OFF for 0.25 second.
Flashing at 1 Hz
The period is 1 second and the vacant period ratio is 50%: ON for 0.5
second and OFF for 0.5 second.
Flashing at 0.25
The period is 2 seconds and the vacant period ratio is 50%: ON for
Hz
1 second and OFF for 1 second.

5-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
5.3 Common Indicators

5.3.1 ENUM Description
ENUM is independent of other LED indicators on the board panel. It indicates the board
status related to the tact switch, as shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 ENUM LED INDICATOR
Status Name
ENUM Status
Description
Tact switch ON
Constantly ON
The board is not in position or

the version is not downloaded
Tact switch alarm
Flashing at 5 Hz
The tact switch is ON when the

board is running. The system
gives the alarm.
Pluggable
Flashing at 1 Hz
The tact switch is ON when the

board is running. The board is
the slave board or is giving out
the resources, so it is pluggable.
Tact switch normal
Constantly OFF
The tact switch of the board is

normal.
5.3.2 ACT Description

The ACT indicator indicates the active or standby status of a board. If a board has
no standby board, its ACT will show the active status by default. The ACT indicator is
described in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 ACT LED INDICATOR
Status Name
ACT Status
Description
Active board
Constantly ON
The board is the active board

currently.
Standby board
Constantly OFF
The board is the standby board

currently.
5.3.3 Combination of RUN and ALM

RUN and ALM are on all boards. The description of their combination is as shown in Table
5-4.
5-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 5 Indicators
Table 5-4 COMBINATION OF RUN AND ALM LED INDICATORS

Status Name
RUN Status
ALM Status
Description
Normal running
Flashing at 1 Hz
Constantly OFF
The board is running

normally.
Flashing at 5 Hz
Constantly OFF
The version is being

downloaded.
Flashing at 1 Hz
Flashing at 5 Hz
The version download

fails, the board is
disaccordant with the
configurations, or the
version can not be
downloaded.
Constantly ON
Constantly OFF
Version download
DEBUG version
indicates that VxWorks
succeeds to be
downloaded, waiting to
download and run the
version.
RELEASE version
indicates that the
version succeeds to
be downloaded and is
being started.
Constantly OFF
Flashing at 5 Hz
The board self-check

fails.
Self-check failure
Constantly OFF
Flashing at 2 Hz
The Operating Support

System startup fails.
Flashing at 5 Hz
Flashing at 5 Hz
Obtaining logic address

fails
Flashing at 5 Hz
Flashing at 2 Hz
The basic process

power-on fails or times
out.
Flashing at 5 Hz
Flashing at 1 Hz
Running faults
The initialized core

data district
Flashing at 2 Hz
Flashing at 5 Hz
The version does not

match the hardware
and the configurations.
Flashing at 2 Hz
Flashing at 2 Hz
The medium plane

communication
disconnects.
5-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Status Name
RUN Status
ALM Status
Description
Flashing at 2 Hz
Flashing at 1 Hz
HW disconnects.
Flashing at 1 Hz
Flashing at 2 Hz
The link with OMP

disconnects.
Flashing at 5 Hz
Flashing at 1 Hz
In M/S switchover
Keep the previous
Constantly ON
The hardware clock is
status
lost.
5-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 6
Front Boards
Table of Contents
Structure ....................................................................................................................6-1
Interface Board Selection ..........................................................................................6-2
APBE Board ...............................................................................................................6-4
APBI Board ..............................................................................................................6-10
CLKG Board.............................................................................................................6-14
DTA Board ...............................................................................................................6-22
DTB Board ...............................................................................................................6-25
DTI Board.................................................................................................................6-30
EIPI Board................................................................................................................6-34
GIPI Board ...............................................................................................................6-37
GIPI3........................................................................................................................6-42
GIPI4........................................................................................................................6-46
GLI Board.................................................................................................................6-50
GUIM Board .............................................................................................................6-54
ICM Board................................................................................................................6-60
ICMG Board .............................................................................................................6-67
IMAB Board..............................................................................................................6-74
PWRD Board ...........................................................................................................6-77
POSI Board..............................................................................................................6-80
PSN Board ...............................................................................................................6-83
RCB Board...............................................................................................................6-87
ROMB Board............................................................................................................6-93
RUB Board.............................................................................................................6-100
SBCX Board...........................................................................................................6-106
SDTA Board ........................................................................................................... 6-112
SDTA2 Board ......................................................................................................... 6-115
SDTB2 Board ......................................................................................................... 6-119
SDTI Board ............................................................................................................6-123
THUB Board...........................................................................................................6-127
UIMC Board ...........................................................................................................6-132
6.1 Structure
The front board consists of the PCB, the subcard, the panel assembly (including the LED
indicator, extractor and EMC spring plate).
The structure of the front board is as shown in Figure 6-1.
6-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-1 STRUCTURE OF FRONT BOARD
1. Extractor
2. Panel of front board
3. PCB
4. Plug
5. Lead sheath
6. Reinforcing rib
6.2 Interface Board Selection

The RNC interface boards include APBE, APBI, DTA, DTB, DTI, EIPI, GIPI, GIPI3, GIPI4,
IMAB, SDTA, SDTA2, SDTB2, SDTI. They are selected according to the transmission and
the interface, as shown in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1 RNC interface board Selection
The Max.
Interface Board
Scenario
Interfaces
Combination
Supported
Outward
Interface Type
Outward
Interface
Printing
RDTA board
1 DTI+
IP Over E1
1 RDTA
32
RDTA E1 inter-
interface printing:
face
T1/E1 1-16
T1/E1 17-32
RDTB board
1 EIPI+
IP Over E1
2 DTB+
64
2 RDTB
IP
Over
E1
(CSTM-1)
IP
Over
(CSTM-1)
E1
1 SDTI
1 EIPI+
1 SDTB2
RDTB E1 inter-
interface printing:
face
T1/E1 1-116
T1/E1 17-32
SDTI CSTM-1 optical interface
SDTB2 STM-1 interface
SDTI board
interface printing:
2 pairs of TX~RX
SDTB2 board
interface printing:
1 pair of TX~RX
6-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 6 Front Boards
The Max.
Interface Board
Scenario
Interfaces
Combination
IP Over STM-1
1 POSI
Supported
Outward
Interface Type
POSI STM-1 interface
Outward
Interface
Printing
POSI board
interface printing:
2 pairs of TX~RX
RGER board
interface printing:
IP Over Ethernet
1 GIPI+
1 GE/4 FE inter-
GIPI GE/FE elec-
GE1
1 RGER/RMNIC
face
trical interface
RMNIC board
interface printing:
FE1FE4
IP Over Ethernet
IP Over Ethernet
1 GIPI3+
2 GE optical inter-
GIPI3 GE electri-
1 RGER
faces
cal interface
1 GIPI4+
2 GE optical inter-
GIPI4 GE electri-
1 RGER
faces
cal interface
GIPI3 board
interface printing:
2 pairs of TX~RX
GIPI4 board
interface printing:
2 pairs of TX~RX
RDTA board
1 DTA+
ATM Over E1
1 RDTA
32
RDTA E1 inter-
interface printing:
face
T1/E1 1-16
T1/E1 17-32
RDTB board
1 IMAB+
ATM Over E1
2 DTB+
interface printing:
64
DTB E1 interface
2 RDTB
T1/E1 1-10
T1/E1 11-21
T1/E1 22-32
ATM
Over
E1
(CSTM-1)
ATM
Over
E1
(CSTM-1)
ATM
Over
E1
(CSTM-1)
ATM over STM-1
1 SDTA
1 SDTA2
1 IMAB+
1 SDTB2
1 APBE+
1 RGIM1
SDTA CSTM-1 interface
SDTA2
interface printing:
2 pairs of TX~RX
CSTM-1
optical interface
APBE STM-1 interface
SDTA board
SDTA2 board
interface printing:
4 pairs of TX~RX
SDTB2 board
interface printing:
2 pairs of TX~RX
APBE board
interface printing:
4 pairs of TX~RX
6-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Scenario
ATM over STM-1
The Max.
Interface Board
Interfaces
Combination
1 APBI+
1 RGIM1
Supported
Outward
Interface Type
APBI STM-1 interface
Outward
Interface
Printing
APBI board
interface printing:
4 pairs of TX~RX
RDTB board
1 APBI+
ATM Over E1
2 DTB+
interface printing:
64
DTB E1 interface
2 RDTB
T1/E1 1-10
T1/E1 11-21
T1/E1 22-32
ATM over STM-1

(CSTM-1)
1 APBI+
1 SDTB2+
1 RGIM1
SDTB2 board
interface printing:
1 pair of TX~RX
Tip:
The low speed IP access usually refers to the connection with E1/T1, E3/T3 or CSTM-1
physical layer, and IP uplayer.
The high speed IP access usually refers to the IP Over Ethernet connection.
In interface board combination, RGIM1 back boards are needed without question only if
the interface board is used for extracting 8K clock.
6.3 APBE Board

6.3.1 APBE Board Definition
The APBE is the ATM processing board of RNC.
6.3.2 Types
APBE board falls into the following two types:
l
l
APBE physical board

APBE/2 physical board
APBE physical board and APBE/2 physical board have the same functions. APBE/2
physical board has higher performance than APBE physical board. APBE physical
board provides three optical interfaces and APBE/2 physical board provides four optical
interfaces.
6.3.3 Functions
APBE (APBE physical board) performs the following functions:
6-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
l
l
Performing STM-1 access and ATM processing

Providing three STM-1 optical interfaces for the system, supporting 1:1 backup,
supporting one pair of APS between boards and two pairs of APS inside one board.
APBE (APBE/2 physical board) performs the following functions:

l
l
Establishing STM-1 access and ATM processing

Providing four STM-1 optical interfaces for the system, supporting 1:1 backup,
supporting one pair of APS inside one board and four pairs of APS between boards,
supporting at most 310 Mbps AAL2 and 620 Mbps AAL5.
The principle of the APBE is as show in Figure 6-2

Figure 6-2 The Schematic Diagram of the APBE
APBE board is composed of the following units:

1. Optical interface unit including the optical unit and PHY chip. It implements the STM-1
access function.
2. ATM layer processing controlling the cell streams, handover and forwarding.
3. Processing unit of the media plane and control plane including AAL2/5 SAR subsystem
and CPU daughter card. After SAR processing, AAL2/5 SAR subsystem falls into two
parts: media plane cell whose stream is send out directly by AAL2/5 SAR subsystem,
and control plane cell whose stream is processed and sent out by CPU daughter card.
6.3.4 Panel
The structure of APBE panel is as shown in Figure 6-3.
6-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-3 APBE PANEL
6.3.5 Indicators
There are twelve LED indicators on APBE panel, as shown in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 LED INDICATORS ON APBE PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
Refer to section 5.3,
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
M/S status indicator
6-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
Special LED indicators.
ON: The current optical
ACT1~4
Green
Optical interface
interface is enabled.
enabled indicator
OFF: The current

optical interface is
disabled.
ON: The optical board
does not receive the
SD1~4
Green
Optical signal indicator
optical signals.
OFF: The optical board
optical signals.
6.3.6 Buttons
The buttons on APBE panel are as shown in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 BUTTONS ON APBE PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.3.7 Interfaces
The interfaces on APBE panel are as shown in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4 INTERFACE ON APBE PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
The fiber on the front
APBE panel
Four pairs of TX~RX
board panel connects
TX: Output
with 4STM-1 optical
RX: Input
interface of the external

system.
6.3.8 Backplane Connection

The backplane connection of APBE is as shown in Table 6-5.
6-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-5 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF APBE

Location
Backplane
Interface Name
Direction
Description
1 100 M control plane
Bi-direction-
The backplane connects the control plane
Ethernet
alal
port of GUIM
2 100 M user plane
Bi-direction-
The backplane connects the user plane port
Ethernet
alal
of GUIM
1 GE media plane
Bi-direction-
Ethernet
alal
The backplane connects the media plane

port of GUIM (Only APBE_2 physical board
supports the 1 GE media plane Ethernet)

APBE (APBE physical board) occupies one slot and APBE (APBE/2 physical board)
occupies one slot, too.
l
APBE (APBE physical board) can be inserted on the resource shelf and interface
shelf. The supported slots are as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF APBE (APBE PHYSICAL BOARD)
APBE (APBE/2 physical board) can be inserted on the 1 G resource shelf and 1 G
interface shelf. The supported slots are as shown in Figure 6-5.
6-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-5 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF APBE (APBE/2 PHYSICAL

BOARD)
6.3.10 Reliability
APBE supports both no backup mode or 1:1 backup mode.
6.3.11 Rear Board

The rear board of APBE is RGIM1.
When APBE is on Iu interface and is set to extract 8 K base clock from CN, the rear board
is RGIM1. Otherwise, insert a blank panel.
6.3.12 APBE CPU Alarms

APBE CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-6.
Table 6-6 APBE CPU Alarms
198005
B-
M-
o-
o-
CP-
ard
th-
U S-
S-
Explana-
N-
er-
ub-
ub-
tion
a-
bo-
card
ca-
me
ard
Other
19800
198005379
389 A
1980025
2561
Board
(CPU)
60 Board
Excess
Doesn't
Subcard
CPU
Temper-
Exist/ CPU
Is Online,
over-
ature of
is in Reset
but Is not
loaded
CPU on
Status for a
Config-
Board
Long Time
ured in
rds
Database
A-
A-
P-
P-
BE
BE
D85
41
19800539
0 A (CPU)
Subcard Is
not Online,
but Has
Been Configured by
Database
C5
Networking
Processor
6-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
AA-
P-
P-
B-
BE
E/
D85
41
APP
Networking
Processor
6.4 APBI Board

6.4.1 APBI Board Definition
The APBI is the ATM&IMA processing board of RNC.
6.4.2 Functions
APBI performs the following functions:
l
l
Supporting at most 64 E1 and 31 IMA groups, working with DTB and SDTB2 to perform
the IMA processing of E1 and CSTM-1 interface
Providing four STM-1 external interfaces, supporting 622 M traffic, and performing the
AAL2 and AAL5 termination of ZXWR RNC.
The principle of the APBI is as show in Figure 6-6

Figure 6-6 The Schematic Diagram of the APBI
6.4.3 Difference between APBI Board Functions and APBI Board

Functions
APBI and APBE include the following types:
l
l
APBE (APBE physical board)

APBE (APBE/2 physical board)
6-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
APBI (APBE/2 physical board)
The difference between APBI and APBE functions are as follows:

l
l
l
n APBI provides IMA processing but APBE does not provide.

n APBE only provides the STM-1 access.
n All other functions are same.
6.4.4 Panel
The structure of APBI panel is as shown in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 APBI PANEL
6.4.5 Indicators
There are twelve LED indicators on APBI panel, as shown in Table 6-7.
6-11
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-7 LED INDICATOR ON APBI PANEL

LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
Board plugging
Common indicators.
Common Indicators.
indicator

ON: The current optical
ACT1~4
Green
Optical interface
interface is enabled.
enabled indicator
OFF: The current

optical interface is
disabled.
SD1~4
Green
optical signals.
optical signals.
6.4.6 Buttons
The buttons on APBI panel are as shown in Table 6-8.
Table 6-8 BUTTON ON APBI PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.4.7 Interfaces
The interfaces on APBI panel are as shown in Table 6-9.
6-12
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-9 INTERFACE ON APBI PANEL

Location
Interface
Direction
Description
The fiber on the front
APBI panel
Four pairs of TX~RX
board panel connects
TX: Output
with 4STM-1 optical
RX: Input
interface of the external

system.

The backplane connection of APBI is as shown Table 6-10.
Table 6-10 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF APBI
Loca-
Interface Name
Direction
Description
tion
1 100 M control
plane Ethernet
2 100 M user
Back-
Bi-directional
Bi-directional
The backplane connects the control plane port of

GUIM.
The backplane connects the user plane port of GUIM.
plane Ethernet
plane
1 GE media
plane Ethernet
16 8 MHW
The backplane connects the media plane port of

Bi-directional
GUIM (Only APBE_2 physical board supports 1

GE media plane Ethernet).
Bi-directional
The backplane connects the circuit switch of GUIM.

APBI occupies one slot on either 1 G resource shelf or 1 G interface shelf. The supported
slots are as shown in Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF APBI
6-13
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.4.10 Reliability
APBI supports non backup mode, 1:1 backup mode, and 1+1 backup mode.
6.4.11 Rear Board

The rear board of APBI is RGIM1.
When APBI is on Iu interface and is set to extract 8 K base clock from CN, the rear board
is RGIM1. Otherwise, insert a blank panel.
The rear board of APBI is same as that of APBE.
6.4.12 APBI CPU Alarms

APBI CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-11.
Table 6-11 APBI CPU Alarms
198005
390 A
Board
Name
Motherboa-
CPU
Subcard
Ot-
19800256
her
1980025
1 Excess
S-
Explana-
60 Board
Temper-
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ature of
loaded
CPU on
cards
198005379
Board
Doesn't Exist/
CPU is in
Reset Status
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
for a Long
Board
Time
rd
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
AA-
P-
P-
B-
BI
E/
IM-
APP Net-
AS
working
D85
41
Processor, in-
cluding
IMA function
6.5 CLKG Board

6.5.1 CLKG Board Definition
The CLKG is the clock generating board of RNC. It provides clock to all shelves.
6-14
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.5.2 Functions
In ZXWR RNC, CLKG is to provides and synchronize the clock for the system.
The principle of the CLKG is as show in Figure 6-9
Figure 6-9 The Schematic Diagram of the CLKG
CLKG board is composed of 5 units:

1. Main control unit, which manages the board and communicates with the system control
unit. The unit applies the core clock control algorithm, and control the output clock
signal and select the reference according to the phase lock unit.
2. Reference selection unit, which selects the proper reference among several options
under the control of the main control unit. The clock reference can be the 8 KHz
frame synchronization signals from DTB or SDTB, or 2 MHz/2 Mbits from the Building
Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).
3. Voltage control crystal oscillator unit, which is made up of thermostatic crystal oscillator
meeting level-three clock standard. It provides high precision clock source for the
board.
4. Phase lock unit, which make phase comparison between regulation clock signal and
input reference. It provides quantization data for the main unit to control the voltage
control crystal oscillator. Loose coupling phase-lock is applied for the system.
5. Active/standby switching unit, which implements Active/standby switching (the
influence to the clock during switching is acceptable).Active and standby CLKG
(CLKG) apply one reference for smooth switching.
Description of the data flow of the board:
1. Perform phase lock by selecting a path of input clock reference. The output is 16 M
and has frame head signals, which are required by the timing, and is distributed to the
UIMU after balance driving.
2. Obtain the new PP2S through pulse extension on the received PP2S and 16 CHIP
signals, and then distribute to each shelf.
6-15
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.5.3 Panel
The structure of CLKG panel is as shown in Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10 CLKG PANEL
6.5.4 Indicators
There are eighteen LED indicators on CLKG panel, as shown in Table 6-12.
Table 6-12 LED INDICATOR ON CLKG PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6-16
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
Special indicator
Bps1
Green
Base indicator
ON: The base is from

the first channel of 2
Mbits clock.
Special indicator
Bps2
Green
Base indicator

the second channel of
2 Mbits clock.
Special indicator
Hz1
Green
Base indicator

MHz clock.
Special indicator
Hz2
Green
Base indicator

2 MHz clock.
Special indicator
8K1
Green
Base indicator

the 8 K clock extracted
by the line.
Special indicator
8K2
Green
Base indicator

the 8 K clock provides
by the external GPS.
Special indicator
8K3
Green
Base indicator
OFF: The base

provided by UIM is
not used.
Special indicator
8K4
Green
Base indicator
the 8 K clock provided

by the GPS on the local
board.
Special indicator
NULL
Green
No clock base indicator
ON: There is no clock

base.
Special indicator
QUTD
Green
Base quality degrading
Red ON: The selected
indicator
base quality is
degrading.
6-17
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
MANI
Color
Meaning
Description
Base selection
Green
enabling indicator
CATCH
Green
State indicator
KEEP
Green
State indicator
TRACE
Green
State indicator
FREE
Green
State indicator
Special indicator
ON: The base selection
is enabled.
Special indicator
ON: In catch state.
Special indicator
ON: In keep state.
Special indicator
ON: In trace state.
Special indicator
ON: In free state.
6.5.5 Buttons
The buttons on CLKG panel are as shown in Table 6-13.
Table 6-13 BUTTON ON CLKG PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
MANEN
Press and the MANI is ON. The clock base can

be selected manually.
MANSL
Press MANEN before selecting the base.

When MANI is ON, press MANSL to select one
clock base from all input clock bases (2 Mbps1, 2
Mbps2, 2 MHz1, 2 MHz2, 8 K1, 8 K2, 8 K3, 8K4,
and NULL will be on in turn).
6.5.6 DIP Switches

1. The DIP switches of CLKG are used to select the resistance. The DIP switches on
CLKG panel are as show in Figure 6-11.
6-18
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-11 SWITCH ON CLKG PANEL
2. The description of DIP switches on CLKG panel is as shown in Table 6-14.

Table 6-14 DIP SWITCH ON CLKG PANEL
Resistance
S5
S1
120
OFF
OFF
100
OFF
ON
75
ON
ON
6.5.7 Interfaces
The interfaces on CLKG panel are as shown in Table 6-15.
Table 6-15 INTERFACE ON CLKG PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
CLKOUT
TX
Description
6 Clock output, connecting all resource shelves and control
shelves.
(One CLKOUT outputs one-to-six cable. There are two UIM
RCKG1
boards on one shelf and they use two clock sockets (each clock
Panel
CLKOUT
TX
socket provides one channel of 16 M, one channel of 8 K, and

one channel of PP2S signal). Therefore, one CLOUT can connect
three shelves, that is, three channels of clock output. There are
6-19
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
two CLKOUT on RCKG1, providing six channels of clock output,
that is, six shelves.
8 KIN1
RX
8 KIN2
RX
2 Mbps/2 MHz
RX
CLKOUT
TX
CLKOUT
TX
2 8 K base input, connecting with 8KOUT/DEBUG-232 on

RGIM1 when the clock base is provided by APBE.
2 8 K base input, connecting with DEBUG-FE/232 on RDTB
when the clock base is provided by DTB.
1 2 M bits&2 MHz input, connecting the external BITS clock
base source.
9 Clock output, connecting all resource shelves and control
shelves.
(There are three CLKOUT on RCKG2, providing nine channels of
clock output, that is, nine shelves.
RCKG2
RCKG1 and RCKG2 can work simultaneously, connecting fifteen
Panel
CLKOUT
TX
shelves in all, which is the largest number of clocks that ZXWR

RNC can connect.)
PP2S/16CHIP
1 GPS base input, connecting the external GPS clock base
RX
source.

The backplane connection of CLKG is described in Table 6-16.
Table 6-16 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF CLKG
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
Monitor
Output
Connecting ROMB on
the local shelf through
the backplane.
Backplane
1 1 M Ethernet
Output
Providing the clock for

UIMC on the local shelf
through the backplane.

CLKG occupies one slot on the control shelf of the master cabinet, as shown in Figure
6-12.
Either RCKG1 or RCKG2 occupies one slot on the rear board of M/S CLKG (RCKG1 is
inserted in the slot with small number and RCKG2 is inserted in the slot with large number).
6-20
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-12 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF CLKG
6.5.10 Reliability
CLKG supports the 1:1 hot backup mode.
6.5.11 Rear Board

The rear board of CLKG is:
l
l
RCKG1
RCKG2
RCKG1 and RCKG2 provide the external interface for CLKG/ICMG. The two rear boards
work simultaneously.
6.5.12 CLKG CPU Alarms

CLKG CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-17.
Table 6-17 CLKG CPU Alarms
198005
MoBo-
th-
ard
er-
Na-
b-
me
oard
390 A
CPU
Subca-
19800538
(CPU)
198005379
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Board Doesn't
Subcard
Is not
Exist/ CPU
Is Online,
Online,
19800
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
2561
Excess
Temperature of
CPU on
is in Reset
but Is not
but Has
Status for a
Config-
Been
Long Time
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Board
rd
Database
-
CCL-
L-
KG
K-
G
CL-
IC-
KG
6-21
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.6 DTA Board

6.6.1 DTA Board Definition
The DTA is the ATM digital trunk board of RNC.
6.6.2 DTA Board Function

DTA board provides E1/T1 interface to the RNC system and processes IMA and ATM.
6.6.3 DTA board panel structure diagram

DTA board panel structure diagram is shown in Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13 DTA Board Panel Structure Diagram
6.6.4 DTA Board Panel Indicator

The indicators on the DTA board are shown in Table 6-18.
6-22
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-18 DTA Board Panel Indicator

Indicator
Color
Meaning
Explanation
RUN
Green
Operation Indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm Indicator
ENUM
Yellow
Removal Indicator
ACT
Green
M/S Indicator
Common
indicators.

Common Indicators.
Special indicator
l
Constant OFF: E1
link is not configured
l
E1 L1-L8
Green
E1 Indicator
Constant ON: E1
is configured but
not properly connected.
1Hz Flash:
E1
is configured and
connected.
Special indicator
Only on indicator in
E1 G1-G4
Green
Group Indicator
G1-G4 is ON at a time
to indicate the E1 group
number.
Note:
The DTA board supports up to 32 E1 connections. The 32 connections are divided into 4
groups for easier operation. They are represented by indicators G1 to G4 each of which
displays 8 E1 connections by 8 indicator, i.e., the indicators L1 to L8.. When LnConstant
OFF (n=1..8) , Gm is on(m=1..4) , the indicator represents the error with the E1 connection
No.n+(m-1) *8.
6.6.5 DTA Panel Key

The DTA board panel key is shown in Table 6-19.
Table 6-19 DTA Board Panel Key
Name:
Explanation
RST
Reset Switch
EXCH:
M/S Changeover Switch
MANSL:
Group Number Changer Key
6-23
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Note:
Press the MANSL key once to turn on one gourp indicator by the order of G1-G2-G3-G4.
Only 8 E1 link status could be displayed each time. The default power indicator is G1.
6.6.6 DTA board's panel interface

DTA board has no panel interface.
6.6.7 DTA Board Back Plane Connection

The DTA board back plane connection is as shown in Table 6-20.
Table 6-20 DTA Board Back Plane Connection
Location
Interface
Direction
Explanation
The back plane con-
1 control plane FE port
Bidirection
nects the GUIM control

plane of the handover
unit.
Back Plane
The back plane con2 media plane GE port
Bidirection
nects the GUIM media

planes of slots 9-10.
6.6.8 DTA Board Configuration Requirement

Each DTA board takes one slot which could be on the Gigabit resource shelf and located
from left to right. It could mix with APBE, GIPI3, GIPI4, SDTA2, DTI, SDTI. Considering
the convenience in maintenance, it is not recommended to use 3 neighboring slots. The
slots available are shown in Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14 DTA board Configuration Diagram
6.6.9 DTA board reliablity

DTA board supports the 1:1 backup.
6-24
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.6.10 DTA board's rear board

DTA board's rear board is the RDTA board.
6.6.11 DTA CPU Alarms

DTA CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-21.
Table 6-21 DTA CPU Alarms
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
D-
D-
D-
T-
T-
85
41
Board
Name
19800
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
2561
IM-
32E1, integrated
interface
198005389
A (CPU)
Doesn't
Subcard
Exist/
Is Online,
CPU is in
but Is not
Reset Sta-
Configured
tus for a
in
Long Time
Database
Excess
Temperature of
CPU on
Board
AE-
1980053
79 Board
198005390
A (CPU)
Subcard Is
not Online,
but Has Been
Configured
by Database
board
6.7 DTB Board

6.7.1 DTB Board Definition
The DTB is the digital trunk board of RNC. It provides E1 interfaces.
6.7.2 Functions
DTB provides thirtytwo channels of E1 interface for the system.
DTB works with APBI or IMAB.
l
l
One APBI and two DTB work simultaneously, providing the function of the complete
E1 access and ATM termination.
One IMAB and two DTB work simultaneously, providing the function of the complete
E1 access and ATM termination.
The principle of the DTB is as show in Figure 6-15
6-25
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-15 The Schematic Diagram of the DTB
6.7.3 Panel
The structure of DTB panel is as shown in Figure 6-16.
Figure 6-16 DTB PANEL
6-26
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.7.4 Indicators
There are thirty-six LED indicators on the DTB, as shown in Table 6-22.
Table 6-22 LED INDICATOR ON DTB PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green

OFF: The E1/T1 is
not configured in the
database.
Constantly ON: The
L1~L32
32 channels of E1
Green
indicator
E1/T1 is configured in
the database but it is
disconnected.
Flashing at 1 Hz
(slowly): The E1/T1
is configured in the
database and it is
connected.
6.7.5 Buttons
The buttons on DTB panel are as shown in Table 6-23.
Table 6-23 BUTTON ON DTB PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
6.7.6 DIP Switches and Jumpers

1. The DIP switches on DTB panel are as shown in Figure 6-17.
6-27
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-17 DIP SWITCH ON DTB PANEL
2. The description of the DIP switches on DTB panel is as shown in Table 6-24.
Table 6-24 DIP SWITCH ON DTB PANEL
DIP
Switch
S1~S6
S9
Description
Default Location
Purpose
To select the
Mode
75 W
ON
ON
ON
ON
resistance for
each E1, 75
S12
W or 120 W
120 W
OFF
OFF
OFF
S7
To indicate
75 W
ON
ON
ON
120 W
OFF
OFF
OFF
SHORT HAUL
ON
ON
ON
LONG HAUL
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
CPU the
resistance for
S8
each E1 chip
OFF
receiving
S10
To indicate
ON
CPU the
S11
hauling status
of E1 chip
OFF
1.
S7 corresponds to one E1 chip and S8 corresponds to one E1 chip.
S7 corresponds to E1 Chip 1~4 (Channel 1~16 E1)
6-28
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)

When powered on, CPU reads the status and initiates the E1 chip according to the status.
2.
S10 corresponds to four E1 chips and S11 corresponds to four E1 chip.
When powered on, CPU reads the status and initiates the E1 chip according to the status.
3. Jumpers on DTB panel

The jumpers on DTB panel are shown in Figure 6-17.
The jumper X23 is for the board debugging. It must be disconnected when the board
is running normally.
6.7.7 Interfaces
There are no interfaces on DTB panel.

The backplane connection of DTB is as shown in Table 6-25.
Table 6-25 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF DTB
Location
Interface Name
Direction
Description
8 8 M HW
Bi-directional
The backplane
connects the control
plane port of
UIMU/GUIM
Backplane
1 100 M Ethernet
Bi-directional
The backplane
connects the user plane
port of UIMU/GUIM

DTB occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 6-18.
Figure 6-18 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF DTB
6-29
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.7.10 Reliability
None.
6.7.11 Rear Board

The rear board of DTB is RDTB.
6.7.12 DTB CPU Alarms

DTB CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-26.
Table 6-26 DTB CPU Alarms
19800
198005
5390 A
389 A
(CPU)
198005379
(CPU)
Sub-
C-
Bo-
M-
a-
ot-
rd
h-
N-
er-
a-
bo-
m-
ard
PU
Subca-
Other
1980025
198002561
S-
Explana-
60 Board
Excess
ub-
tion
CPU over-
Temperature of
loaded
CPU on Board
cards
Board
Subcard
card
Doesn't
Is On-
Is not
Exist/ CPU
line, but
Online,
is in Reset
Is not
but Has
Status for a
Config-
Been
Long Time
ured in
Config-
Data-
ured by
base
Data-
rd
base
DTB
DTEC
Infineon
Chip
6.8 DTI Board

6.8.1 DTI Board Definition
The DTI is the IP digital trunk board of RNC.
6.8.2 DTI Board Function

The DTI board provides the E1/T1 interface to the RNC system and performs HDLC/PPP
processing.
6.8.3 DTI Board Panel Structure Diagram

The DTI board panel structure diagram is shown in Figure 6-19.
6-30
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-19 DTI Board Panel Structure Diagram
6.8.4 DTI Board Panel Indicator

The indicators on the DTI are shown in Table 6-27.
Table 6-27 DTI board panel Indicator
Indicator
color
meaning
RUN
Green
operation Indicator
ALM
Red
alarm Indicator
Explanation
Common
indicators.

ENUM
Yellow
removal Indicator
ACT
Green
M/S Indicator
Common Indicators.
6-31
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Indicator
color
meaning
Explanation
Special indicator
l
Constant OFF: E1
link is not configured
l
E1 L1-L8
Green
E1 Indicator
Constant ON: E1
is configured but
not properly connected.
1Hz Flash:
E1
is configured and
connected.
Special indicator
Only on indicator in
E1 G1-G4
Green
Group Indicator
G1-G4 is ON at a time
to indicate the E1 group
number.
Note:
The DTI board supports up to 32 E1 connections. The 32 connections are divided into 4
groups for easier operation. They are represented by indicators G1 to G4 each of which
displays 8 E1 connections by 8 indicator, i.e., the indicators L1 to L8.. When LnConstant
OFF (n=1..8) , Gm is on(m=1..4) , the indicator represents the error with the E1 connection
No.n+(m-1) *8.
6.8.5 DTI Board Panel Key

The DTI board has three keys is shown in Table 6-28.
Table 6-28 DTI Board Panel Key
Name:
Explanation
EXCH:
M/S Changeover Switch
RST
Reset Switch
MANSL:
Group Number Changer Key
Note:
Press the MANSL key once to turn on one gourp indicator by the order of G1-G2-G3-G4.
Only 8 E1 link status could be displayed each time. The default power indicator is G1.
6-32
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.8.6 DTI board's panel interface

DTI board has no panel interface.
6.8.7 DTI Board Back Plane Connection

The DTI board back plane connection is as shown in Table 6-29.
Table 6-29 DTI Board Back Plane Connection
Location
Interface
Direction
Explanation
The back plane con-
Bidirection
nects the GUIM control

plane of the handover
unit.
Back Plane
The back plane con2 media plane GE port
Bidirection
nects the GUIM media

planes of slots 9-10.
6.8.8 DTI Board Configuration Requirement

Each DTI board takes 1 slot which could be on the Gigabit resource shelf and located from
left to right. It could mix with APBE, GIPI3, GIPI4, SDTA2, DTI, SDTA. Considering the
convenience in maintenance, it is not recommended to use 3 neighboring slots. The slots
available are shown in Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20 DTI board Configuration Diagram
6.8.9 DTI board reliablity

DTI board supports 1:1 backup.
6.8.10 DTI board's rear board

DTI board's rear board is RDTA board.
6-33
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.9 EIPI Board

6.9.1 EIPI Board Definition
The EIPI is the E1 IP interface board of RNC. It provides the IP access over E1.
6.9.2 Functions
EIPI provides the IP access based on E1 (working with DTB and SDTB2). EIPI do not
have the external interfaces itself.
l
l
One EIPI and two DTB work simultaneously, providing at most sixty-four E1 interfaces.
Two EIPI and two SDTB2 work simultaneously, providing two CSTM-1 interfaces.
The principle of the EIPI is as show in Figure 6-21

Figure 6-21 The Schematic Diagram of the EIPI
6.9.3 Panel
The structure of EIPI panel is as shown in Figure 6-22.
6-34
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-22 EIPI PANEL
6.9.4 Indicators
There are four indicators on EIPI panel, as shown in Table 6-30.
Table 6-30 LED INDICATOR ON EIPI PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6.9.5 Buttons
The buttons on EIPI panel are as shown in Table 6-31.
6-35
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-31 BUTTON ON EIPI PANEL

Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.9.6 Interfaces
There are no interfaces on EIPI panel.

The backplane connection of EIPI is as shown in Table 6-32.
Table 6-32 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF EIPI
Location
Interface Name
Direction
Description
1 100 M Ethernet
Bi-directional
The backplane
plane of UIMU/GUIM
1 1 G Ethernet
Bi-directional
The backplane
connects the user
plane of GUIM.
Backplane
4 100 M Ethernet
Bi-directional
The backplane
connects the user
plane of UIMU.
8 16 MHW Ethernet
Bi-directional
The backplane
connects with the
circuit switching of
UIMU/GUIM.

EIPI occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF EIPI
6-36
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.9.9 Reliability
EIPI supports the 1+1 backup mode.
6.9.10 Rear Board

EIPI has no rear board. Instead, it has a blank panel in the corresponding slot.
6.9.11 EIPI CPU Alarms

EIPI CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-33.
Table 6-33 EIPI CPU Alarms
198005
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
390 A
19800538
Other
19800256
198005379
9 A (CPU)
1980025
1 Excess
Board Doesn't
Subcard
S-
Explana-
60 Board
Temper-
Exist/ CPU
Is Online,
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ature of
is in Reset
but Is not
loaded
CPU on
Status for a
Config-
Board
Long Time
ured in
cards
Database
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online,
but Has
Been
Configured by
Database
MEIPI
NI-
HP-
Working
with DTB
to provide
C/
the IPoE1
Function
6.10 GIPI Board

6.10.1 GIPI Board Definition
The GIPI is the Gigabit IP interface board of RNC. It provides the IP access.
6.10.2 Functions
In ZXWR RNC, GIPI performs the function of all IP interfaces and OMCB gateway.
The principle of the GIPI is as show in Figure 6-24
6-37
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-24 The Schematic Diagram of the GIPI
6.10.3 GIPI Board Panel

The structure of GIPI panel is as shown in Figure 6-25.
6-38
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-25 GIPI PANEL
6.10.4 Indicators
There are five LED indicators on GIPI panel, as shown in Table 6-34.
Table 6-34 LED INDICATOR ON GIPI PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6-39
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
SD
Green
optical signals.
optical signals.
6.10.5 Buttons
The buttons on GIPI panel are as shown in Table 6-35.
Table 6-35 BUTTON ON GIPI PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.10.6 Interfaces
The interfaces on GIPI panel are as shown in Table 6-36.
Table 6-36 INTERFACE ON GIPI PANEL
Location
Interface
GIPI panel
One pair of TX~RX
Direction
Description
TX: Output
Provides an optical GE
RX: Input
port externally.

The backplane connection of GIPI is as shown in Table 6-37.
Table 6-37 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF GIPI
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
1 100 M control
Bi-directional
The backplane connects the control plane of
plane Ethernet
Backplane
1 1 G user plane
UIMU/GUIM
Bi-directional
Ethernet
4 100 M user plane
The backplane connects the user plane of

GUIM/UIMU.
Bi-directional
Ethernet
The backplane connects the user plane of

GUIM/UIMU.
6-40
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)

GIPI occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 6-26.
Figure 6-26 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF GIPI
6.10.9 GIPI Board Reliability

GIPI supports the load sharing.
6.10.10 Rear Board

The rear board of GIPI is:
l
l
RGER, led out through GE interface

RGER2, led out through FE interface
6.10.11 GIPI CPU Alarms

GIPI CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-38.
Table 6-38 GIPI CPU Alarms
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
MGIPI
198005
19800
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
2561
Excess
198005379
Board Doesn't
Exist/ CPU
Temperature of
CPU on
is in Reset
Status for a
Long Time
Board
390 A
19800538
9 A (CPU)
Subcard Is
Online, but
Is not Configured in
Database
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not Online, but
Has Been
Configured by
Database
NI-
C/
2
6-41
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.11 GIPI3
6.11.1 GIPI3 Board Definition
The GIPI3 is the Gigabit Ethernet interface board of RNC.
6.11.2 GIPI3 Board Functions

In a ZXWR RNC system, the GIPI3 board provides GE interface access and OMC-B data
forwarding functions.
6.11.3 GIPI3 Board Panel

The GIPI3 board provides Gigabit optical interfaces. The panel structure of the board is
Figure 6-27 GIPI3 Board Panel
6-42
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.11.4 Indicators
The indicators on the GIPI3 board are shown in Table 6-39.
Table 6-39 GIPI3 board panel Indicator
Indicator
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Operation indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
ENUM
Yellow
Removal indicator
ACT
Green
M/S indicator
Explanation
Common
indicators.

Common Indicators.
Special indicator
ACT
Optical interface data
Green
transceiving indicator
If data transceiving
exists at the optical
interface, the ACT is
on. Otherwise, it is off.
SD
Fiber optics plug indica-
Green
tor
If an optical fiber is
plugged, the SD is on.
Otherwise, it is off.
Special indicator
ACT1
Green
interface, the ACT1 is
Special indicator
ACT2
Green
If the electrical interface
LINK1
Electrical interface link
Green
status indicator
link is normal, the

LINK1 is on. If the link
is disconnected, the
LINK1 is off.
LINK2
Green
status indicator
link is normal, the

LINK2 is off.
6-43
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.11.5 Buttons
The buttons on the GIPI3 board panel are shown in Table 6-40.
Table 6-40 Buttons on GIPI3 Board Panel
Name
Explanation
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S changeover switch
6.11.6 Interfaces
The interfaces of the GIPI3 board panel are shown in Table 6-41.
Table 6-41 Interfaces on GIPI3 board panel
Location
Front
board
panel
Interface
GIPI3
2 pairs of TX~RX
Direction
Explanation
Providing two Gigabit
TX: output
Ethernet optical inter-
RX: input
faces externally

The backplane connections on the GIPI3 board are shown in Table 6-42.
Table 6-42 Backplane Connections on GIPI3 Board
Location
Interface
Direction
Explanation
The
Bidirectional
backplane
con-
nects the control plane

port on the GUIM board
of the switching unit.
Backplane
The
2 user plane GE port
Bidirectional
backplane
con-
nects the user plane


Each GIPI3 board occupies one slot and can be inserted into the Gigabit resource shelf.
The slots available are shown in Figure 6-28.
6-44
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-28 GIPI3 Board Configuration
6.11.9 Reliability
The GIPI3 board supports the 1+1 backup or the load-sharing backup.
6.11.10 Rear Board

The rear boards of GIPI3 board are RGER and RGER2. The RGER does not output
synchronous Ethernet clock. The RGER2 can output 8K synchronous Ethernet clock to
the clock board.
6.11.11 GIPI3 CPU Alarms

GIPI3 CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-43.
Table 6-43 GIPI3 CPU Alarms
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
198005
19800
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
2561
Excess
Temperature of
CPU on
198005379
Board Doesn't
Exist/ CPU
is in Reset
Status for a
Long Time
Board
390 A
19800538
9 A (CPU)
Subcard Is
Online, but
Is not Configured in
Database
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not Online, but
Has Been
Configured by
Database
Two GE
interfaces,
MGIPI3
support-
NI-
ing syn-
chronous
C/
Ethernet
and 1588
function
optimization
6-45
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.12 GIPI4
6.12.1 GIPI4 Board Definition
The GIPI4 is the Gigabit Ethernet interface board of RNC.
6.12.2 GIPI4 Board Functions

In a ZXWR RNC system, the GIPI4 board provides GE interface access and OMC-B data
forwarding functions.
6.12.3 GIPI4 Board Panel

The GIPI4 board provides Gigabit optical interfaces. The panel structure of the board is
Figure 6-29 GIPI4 Board Panel
6-46
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.12.4 Indicators
The indicators on the GIPI4 board are shown in Table 6-44.
Table 6-44 GIPI4 board panel Indicator
Indicator
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Operation indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
ENUM
Yellow
Removal indicator
ACT
Green
M/S indicator
Explanation
Common
indicators.

Common Indicators.
Special indicator
ACT
Green
interface, the ACT is
SD
Fiber optics plug indica-
Green
tor
If an optical fiber is
plugged, the SD is on.
Otherwise, it is off.
Special indicator
ACT1
Green
Special indicator
ACT2
Green
LINK1
Green
status indicator
link is normal, the

LINK1 is off.
LINK2
Green
status indicator
link is normal, the

LINK2 is off.
6-47
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.12.5 Buttons
The buttons on the GIPI4 board panel are shown in Table 6-45.
Table 6-45 Buttons on GIPI4 Board Panel
Name
Explanation
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S changeover switch
6.12.6 Interfaces
The interfaces of the GIPI4 board panel are shown in Table 6-46.
Table 6-46 Interfaces on GIPI4 board panel
Location
Front
board
panel
Interface
GIPI4
2 pairs of TX~RX
Direction
Explanation
Providing two Gigabit
TX: output
Ethernet optical inter-
RX: input
faces externally

The backplane connections on the GIPI4 board are shown in Table 6-47.
Table 6-47 Backplane Connections on GIPI4 Board
Location
Interface
Direction
Explanation
The
Bidirectional
backplane
con-
nects the control plane

Backplane
The
2 user plane GE port
Bidirectional
backplane
con-
nects the user plane


Each GIPI4 board occupies one slot and can be inserted into the Gigabit resource shelf.
The slots available are shown in Figure 6-30.
6-48
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-30 GIPI4 Board Configuration
6.12.9 Reliability
The GIPI4 board supports the 1+1 backup or the load-sharing backup.
6.12.10 Rear Board

The rear boards of GIPI4 board are RGER and RGER2. The RGER does not output
synchronous Ethernet clock. The RGER2 can output 8K synchronous Ethernet clock to
the clock board.
6.12.11 GIPI4 CPU Alarms

GIPI4 CPU alarms are shown inTable 6-48.
Table 6-48 GIPI4 CPU Alarms
198005
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
390 A
19800
198005379
2561
Board
Excess
Doesn't Exist/
Temper-
CPU is in
ature of
Reset Status
CPU on
for a Long
Board
Time
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
Two GE
inter-
GIPI4
M-
faces,
N-
support-
I-
ing syn-
C/
chronous
Ethernet
and 1588
function
6-49
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
optimization
6.13 GLI Board

6.13.1 GLI Board Definition
The GLI is the Gigabit line interface board of RNC. It provides interfaces between the
handover shelf and the resource shelf.
6.13.2 Functions
GLI is a GE interface board, providing internal interfaces for the switching shelf and
resource shelf and external interfaces. GLI performs the physical layer adaptation, IP
package checklist, segment, forwarding and traffic management.
The principle of the GLI is as show in Figure 6-31
Figure 6-31 The Schematic Diagram of the GLI
GLI board is composed of 5 units:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Optical interface unit, which provides GE optical port to support physical backup.
Logical unit, which implements all the logical processing functions.
Ethernet interface unit, which implements GE PHY and MAC functions.
Service processing unit, which implements bi-directional IP packet table look-up,
fragmenting, forwarding and traffic management.
5. Queue management unit, which implements bi-directional queue management.
1. GLI board receives the media plane data from the resource shelf/GE resource shelf
through the optical port.
2. The data from GE optical port to the board is processed by the service processing unit
and then reach the switching side interface. After that, the data is send to the PSN
switch fabric card.
From PSN to GLI, the data is processed by the service processing unit and is framed. After
that the data is sent out via the corresponding optical port.
6-50
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.13.3 Panel
The structure of GLI panel is as shown in Figure 6-32.
Figure 6-32 GLI PANEL
6.13.4 Indicators
There are twenty LED indicators on GLI panel, as shown in Table 6-49.
Table 6-49 LED INDICATOR ON GLI PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6-51
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
ON: The logic is not
normal (it is OFF
until there is logic in
ACT1~8
Optical interface
Green
enabled indicator
FPGA. Otherwise, it is
constantly ON).
Flashing: It flashes
according to the
received and
transmitted data after
the logic is normal.
SD1~8
Green
optical signals.
optical signals.
6.13.5 Buttons
The buttons on GLI panel are as shown in Table 6-50.
Table 6-50 BUTTON ON GLI PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.13.6 Interfaces
The interfaces on GLI panel are as shown in Table 6-51 .
6-52
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-51 INTERFACE ON GLI PANEL

Location
Interface
Direction
Description
The fiber leads out
through 8 STM-1
optical interface to
connect with UIMU on
each resource shelf, to
GLI panel
Eight pairs of TX~RX
Bi-directional
access service on the

resource shelf into the
switching platform (it
provides 4 pairs of GE
optical interfaces, M/S
by twos, SD1 To SD2,
SD3 to SD4, and so on)

The backplane connection on GLI panel is as shown in Table 6-52.
Table 6-52 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF GLI
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
The backplane
Backplane
1 100 M
Bi-directional
connects the UIMC

on the local shelf.

GLI occupies one slot on the switching shelf, as shown in Figure 6-33.
Figure 6-33 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF GLI
6.13.9 Reliability
GLI supports the load sharing mode.
6-53
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.13.10 Rear Board

GLI has no rear board. Instead, it has a blank panel in the corresponding slot.
6.13.11 GLI CPU Alarms

GLI CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-53.
Table 6-53 GLI CPU Alarms
198005
390 A
C-
B-
P-
oa-
Mot-
rd
her-
N-
boa-
a-
rd
m-
U
Subca-
198005379
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198002561
Board
Excess
Doesn't
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
ture of CPU
is in Reset
on Board
Status for a
Long Time
rd
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
G-
GLI-
LI
QV
GLI
NP-
GLIQV/
I24
6.14 GUIM Board

6.14.1 GUIM Board Definition
The GUIM is the Gigabit universal interface module of RNC.
6.14.2 Functions
GUIM performs the following functions:
l
l
Providing 32 K circuit switching for the 1 G resource shelf and acts as a switching
HUB, falling into the control plane and the user plane.
Providing the clock drive on the resource shelf, inputting 8 K and 16 M signals,
distributing the clock to all slots on the resource shelf after locking the phase and
driving, and providing 16 M and 8 K clocks for the resource boards.
The principle of the GUIM is as show in Figure 6-34

6-54
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-34 The Schematic Diagram of the GUIM
GUIM is composed of the following four units:

1. CPU unit, which connects with the time-slot switching unit, logical unit and Ethernet
switching unit. It implements the configuration and management of the switching unit,
logical unit and GE resource shelf.
2. Logical unit, which implements all the logical processing functions.
3. Time-slot switching unit, which has the capability of 16 K circuit switching. It provides
an internal circuit switching network for the GE resource shelf.
4. Ethernet switching unit, which implements the Ethernet switching function of the user
plane and control plane in a GE resource shelf.
1. The external data, which is from each board of the shelf containing the GUIM, goes
into the Ethernet switching unit or the time-slot switching unit for switching processing,
and then sent to the destination board or the level-1 switching interface board.
6.14.3 Panel
The structure of GUIM panel is as shown in Figure 6-35.
6-55
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-35 GUIM PANEL
6.14.4 Indicators
There are twenty LED indicators on GUIM panel, as shown in Table 6-54.
Table 6-54 LED INDICATOR ON GUIM PANEL
LED
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Indicator
Common indicators. Refer to section 5.3,

ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
ACT-P
Green
Board plugging
Common Indicators.
indicator
PS domain master
indicator
Special LED indicator

ON: The PS domain of the board is master.
OFF: The PS domain of the board is slave.
6-56
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED
Color
Meaning
Description
Indicator
ACT-T
Green
CS domain master
indicator

ON: The CS domain of the board is master.
OFF: The CS domain of the board is salve.
ACT1~4
Green
Optical interface
enabled indicator
ON: The logic is not normal (it is OFF until there

is logic in FPGA. Otherwise, it is constantly ON).
Flashing: It flashes according to the received and
transmitted data after the logic is normal.
ON: The optical board does not receive the
SD1~4
Green
optical signals.
OFF: The optical board does not receive the
optical signals.
Control plane
L1
Green
cascading interface
status indicator
Control plane
L2
Green
cascading interface
status indicator
Control plane
L3
Green
cascading interface
status indicator
Control plane
L4
Green
cascading interface
status indicator
Control plane
L5
Green
cascading interface
status indicator
Control plane
L6
Green
cascading interface
status indicator

ON: FE1 port on RGUM1 is connected normally.
OFF: FE1 port on RGUM1 is not connected or
connected abnormally.
6-57
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.14.5 Buttons
The buttons on GUIM panel are as shown in Table 6-55.
Table 6-55 BUTTON ON GUIM PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.14.6 Interfaces
The interfaces on GUIM panel are as shown in Table 6-56.
Table 6-56 INTERFACE ON GUIM PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
4 1 G optical
interfaces, The fiber
on the front board
connects GLI of the
switching unit, for the
expansion of the user
plane.
Or, when there are
GUIM panel
Four pairs of TX~RX
Bi-directional
two 1 G resource
shelves, interconnect
GUIM between the two
shelves.
Or, when there is one
1 G resource shelf
and one 1 G interface
shelf, interconnect
GUIM between the two
shelves.

The backplane connection of GUIM is as shown in Table 6-57.
6-58
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-57 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF GUIM

Loca-
Interface
tion
Name
4 100 M
Ethernet
20 100 M
Ethernet
Back-
21 1 G
plane
Ethernet
21 100 M
Ethernet
120 8 M HW
Direction
Description
Bi-directional
Bi-directional
Bi-directional
Bi-directional
Bi-directional
The backplane connects CHUB.
The backplane connects the user plane of all boards

on the local shelf.
The backplane connects the user plane of all boards
on the local shelf.
The backplane connects the control plane of all boards
on the local shelf.
The backplane connects IMAB, DTB, and SDTB2 on
the local shelf.

GUIM occupies one slot on either the 1 G resource shelf or the 1 G switching shelf, as
Figure 6-36 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF GUIM
6.14.9 Reliability
GUIM supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6.14.10 Rear Board

The rear board of GUIM is:
l
l
RGUM1
RGUM2
6.14.11 GUIM CPU Alarms

GUIM CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-58.
6-59
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-58 GUIM CPU Alarms

198005
390 A
CMBo-
o-
ard
th-
Na-
er-
me
board
PU
Subca-
Ot-
19800256
her
1980025
1 Excess
Temper-
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ature of
loaded
CPU on
cards
Board
198005379
Board
Doesn't Exist/
CPU is in
Reset Status
for a Long
Time
rd
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
Used for
BGSN;
providing
G-
G-
D-
a 2GE
UI-
UI-
82
optical
70
interface
that
connects
with GLI
6.15 ICM Board

6.15.1 ICM Board Definition
The ICM is the integrated clock module of RNC. It provides clock signals to all shelves.
6.15.2 Functions
ICM performs the following functions:
l
l
l
l
l
Receiving the signals from GPS satellite, extracting and generating IPPS signals and
the corresponding navigation messages (TOD message), and with this IPPS signal
as the base phase-locked, generating PP2S, 19.6608MHz and system 8 K clock base
required for the RNC/BTS
Supporting BITS, one channel of line (8 K), two channels of GPS8K (one is from the
local board and the other is from external GPS), and UIM8K as the local clock base
Exporting Level 3 or Level 2 clock
Selecting the clock base manually
Judging the clock loss and input base clock degrading
The principle of the ICM is as show in Figure 6-37

6-60
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-37 The Schematic Diagram of the ICM
6.15.3 Difference between ICM Board and CLKG/ICMG Board

Compared with CLKG, ICM has the GPS function. ICM can provide the system with GPS
satellite information, for the system positioning. In addition, it provides one more sources
for the base clock.
Compared with ICMG, the GPS subcard of the ICM is cheaper. ICM is applicable to the
system that does not have strict requirements for the positioning information or that only
requires the GPS to provide the base clock source.
6.15.4 Panel
The structure of ICM panel is as shown in Figure 6-38.
6-61
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-38 ICM PANEL
6.15.5 Indicators
There are twenty-three LED indicators on ICM panel, as shown in Table 6-59.
Table 6-59 LED INDICATOR ON ICM PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
CATCH
Green
State indicator
On: In catch state.
TRACE
Green
State indicator
On: In the trace state.
KEEP
Green
State indicator
On: In the keep state.
FREE
Green
State indicator
On: In the free state.
Common indicators.
Board plugging
indicator
Common Indicators.
6-62
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
On: The base is from
2Mbits1
Green
Base indicator
the first channel of

2Mbits clock.
2Mbits2
Green
Base indicator

2Mbits clock.
2MHz1
Green
Base indicator
the first channel of

2MHz clock.
2MHz2
Green
Base indicator

2MHz clock.
8K1
Green
Base indicator

by the line.
8K2
Green
Base indicator

OFF: The base
8K3
Green
Base indicator
provided by UIM is
not used.
8K4
Green
Base indicator
the 8 K clock provided

by the GPS on the local
board.
NULL
QUTD
MANI
Green
Green
indicator
Green

base.
Red ON: The selected
base quality is
degrading.
Base selection
enabling indicator
is enabled.
6-63
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
ON: The system clock
is normal.
OFF: 16chip
phase-locked loop
is unlocked.
SCS
Green
Clock base indicator
Flashing quickly: The

output 16chip signals
are abnormal.
Flashing slowly: The
output pp2s signals are
abnormal.
CCS
Green
Clock base indicator
The circuit clock 12.8M

PLL is locked normally.
The receiver
ANT
Green
Antenna state indicator
initialization is normal,
or the antenna feeder
is open-circuit.
OFF (black): GPS
single-mode receiver
ON (green):
GPS/GONOLASS
TYP
Green
Mode indicator
dual-mode receiver
ON (yellow):
GPS/GONOLASS/Bei
dou timing triple-mode
receiver
6.15.6 Buttons
The buttons on ICM panel are as shown in Table 6-60.
Table 6-60 BUTTONS ON ICM PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
MANEN
Press and the MANI is ON. The clock base can

be selected manually.
6-64
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Button
Description
MANSL

Mbps2, 2 MHz1, 2 MHz2, 8 K1, 8 K2, 8 K3, 8K4,
6.15.7 DIP Switches

1. The DIP switches on ICM panel are as shown in Figure 6-39.
Figure 6-39 DIP SWITCHES ON ICM PANEL
2. The DIP switches of ICM are used to select the resistance. The description of the DIP
switches on ICM panel is as shown in Table 6-61.
Table 6-61 DIP SWITCHES ON ICM PANEL
Resistance
S5
S1
120
OFF
OFF
100
OFF
ON
75
ON
ON
6-65
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.15.8 Interfaces
The interfaces on ICM panel are as shown in Table 6-62.
Table 6-62 INTERFACE ON ICM PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
Rx
The cable is connected

to GPS antenna,
GPS
receiving GPS satellite

signals.
ICM panel
Tx
PP2S
GPS module is sent to

the front panel PP2S.
Tx
10 M
GPS module is sent to

the front panel 10 M.

The backplane connection of ICM is as shown in Table 6-63.
Table 6-63 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF ICM
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
1 100 M. The
Backplane
1 100 M Ethernet
Bi-directional
backplane connects
UIMC.

ICM occupies one slot on the control shelf of the master cabinet, as shown in Figure 6-40.
Figure 6-40 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF ICM
6.15.11 Reliability
ICM supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6.15.12 Rear Board

The rear board of ICM is:
6-66
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
l
l
RCKG1
RCKG2
RCKG1 and RCKG2 provide an external interface for ICM. The two rear boards work
simultaneously.
6.15.13 ICM CPU Alarms

ICM CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-64.
Table 6-64 ICM CPU Alarms
198005
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
390 A
198005379
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198002561
Board
Excess
Doesn't Exist/
Tempera-
CPU is in
ture of CPU
Reset Status
on Board
for a Long
Time
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
I-
I-
C-
C-
Ub-
Support-
lox
ing GPS
clock reference
and position
6.16 ICMG Board

6.16.1 ICMG Board Definition
The ICMG is the integrated clock module (GPS) of RNC. It provides clock signals to all
shelves.
6.16.2 Functions
ICMG provides and synchronizes the clock for the system. In addition, ICMG receives
the GPS information (receiving GPS signals and generating 8 K clock base) and supports
level-2 clock.
The principle of the ICMG is as show in Figure 6-41
6-67
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-41 The Schematic Diagram of the ICMG
6.16.3 Difference between CLKG Board and ICMG Board

Besides that ICMG provides CLKG, it also provides the embedded GPS receiver, which
can provide the system GPS information data.
6.16.4 Panel
The structure of ICMG panel is as shown in Figure 6-42.
6-68
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-42 ICMG PANEL
6.16.5 Indicators
There are eighteen LED indicators on ICMG panel, as shown in Table 6-65.
Table 6-65 LED INDICATOR ON ICMG PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green

Special indicator
Bps1
Green
Base indicator

Mbits clock.
6-69
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
Special indicator
Bps2
Green
Base indicator

2 Mbits clock.
Special indicator
Hz1
Green
Base indicator

MHz clock.
Special indicator
Hz2
Green
Base indicator

2 MHz clock.
Special indicator
8K1
Green
Base indicator

by the line.
Special indicator
8K2
Green
Base indicator

Special indicator
8K3
Green
Base indicator
ON: The base is

provided by UIM.
Special indicator
8K4
Green
Base indicator
ON: The base provided

by UIM is not used.
Special indicator
NULL
Green

base.
Special indicator
QUTD
Green
Red on: The selected
indicator
base quality is
degrading.
MANI
CATCH
Base selection
Green
enabling indicator
Green
State indicator
Special indicator
is enabled.
Special indicator
ON: In catch state.
6-70
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
KEEP
Green
State indicator
TRACE
Green
State indicator
FREE
Green
State indicator
Special indicator
ON: In keep state.
Special indicator
ON: In trace state.
Special indicator
ON: In free state.
6.16.6 Buttons
The buttons on ICMG panel are as shown in Table 6-66.
Table 6-66 BUTTON ON CLMG PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
MANEN
Press MANEN and the MANI becomes ON. The

clock base can be selected manually.
MANSL

Mbps2, 2 MHz1, 2 MHz2, 8 K1, 8 K2, 8 K3, 8K4,
6.16.7 DIP Switches

1. The DIP switches on ICMG panel are as shown in Figure 6-43.
6-71
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-43 DIP SWITCHES ON ICMG PANEL
2. The DIP switches of ICMG are used to select the resistance. The description of the
DIP switches on ICMG panel is as show in Table 6-67.
Table 6-67 DIP SWITCH ON ICMG PANEL
Resistance
S5
S1
120
OFF
OFF
100
OFF
ON
75
ON
ON
6.16.8 Interfaces
The interfaces on ICMG panel are as shown in Table 6-68.
Table 6-68 INTERFACE ON ICMG PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
The cable connects
ICMG
GPS
RX
the GPS antenna,

receiving the GPS
signals.
6-72
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)

The backplane connection of ICMG is as shown in Table 6-69.
Table 6-69 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF ICMG
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
1 100 M. The
Backplane
1 100 M Ethernet
Bi-directional
backplane connects
UIMC.

ICMG occupies one slot on the control shelf of the master cabinet, as shown in Figure
6-44.
Figure 6-44 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF ICMG
6.16.11 Reliability
ICMG supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6.16.12 Rear Board

The rear board of ICMG is:
l
l
RCKG1
RCKG2
RCKG1 and RCKG2 provide an external interface for CLKG/ICMG. The two rear boards
work simultaneously.
6.16.13 ICMG CPU Alarms

ICMG CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-70.
6-73
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-70 ICMG CPU Alarms

198005
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
ar-
rd
198005
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198005379
389 A
198002561
Board
(CPU)
Excess
Doesn't
Subcard
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
Is Online,
ture of CPU
is in Reset
but Is not
on Board
Status for a
Config-
Long Time
ured in
Database
390 A
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online,
but Has
Been
Configured by
Database
I-
IC-
C-
MG
NO-
AGPS
VA-
position
TEL
function
requirement
6.17 IMAB Board

6.17.1 IMAB Board Definition
The IMAB is the IMA/ATM protocol processing board of RNC.
6.17.2 Functions
IMAB performs the following functions:
l
l
One IMAB and two DTB work simultaneously.

Two IMAB and one SDTB2 work simultaneously (users can select SDTA to replace
the combination of IMAB and SDTB2).
IMAB works with DTB/SDTB2, providing the function of the complete E1 access and ATM
termination.
One IMAB can support at most 30 IMA groups and one IMA group can support at most 32
E1 links.
6.17.3 Panel
The structure of IMAB panel is as shown in Figure 6-45.
6-74
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-45 IMAB PANEL
6.17.4 Indicators
There are four LED indicators on IMAB panel, as shown in Table 6-71.
Table 6-71 LED INDICATOR ON IMAB PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6.17.5 Buttons
The buttons on IMAB panel are as shown in Table 6-72.
6-75
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-72 BUTTON ON IMAB PANEL

Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.17.6 Interfaces
There are no interfaces on IMAB panel.

The backplane connection of IMAB is as shown in Table 6-73.
Table 6-73 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF IMAB
Location
Backplane
Interface Name
Description
The backplane connects the control plane port of
Ethernet
UIMU/GUIM.
2 100 M user plane
The backplane connects the user plane port of
Ethernet
UIMU/GUIM.
16 8 M HW
The backplane connects the CS switching of

UIMU/GUIM, thus connecting DTB/SDTB2.

IMAB occupies one slot on the interface shelf, as shown in Figure 6-46.
Figure 6-46 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF IMAB
6.17.9 Reliability
IMAB supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6-76
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.17.10 Rear Board

IMAB has no rear board. Instead, it has a blank panel in the corresponding slot.
6.17.11 IMAB CPU Alarms

IMAB CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-74.
Table 6-74 IMAB CPU Alarms
198005
390 A
CB-
M-
o-
o-
ard
th-
N-
er-
a-
bo-
me
ard
PU
Subca-
19800
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
2561
Excess
Temperature of
CPU on
19800538
(CPU)
198005379
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Board Doesn't
Subcard
Is not
Exist/ CPU
Is Online,
Online,
is in Reset
but Is not
but Has
Status for a
Config-
Been
Long Time
Board
rd
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
IM-
IM-
AB
AB
Based on
D-
C5 Net-
85
working
41
Proces-
sor
6.18 PWRD Board

6.18.1 PWRD Board Definition
The PWRD Board is the power distribution board of RNC.
6.18.2 PWRD Board Functions

PWRD performs the following functions:
l
l
l
Providing -48 V power supply for fan and each of the shelves in the rack.
Implementing rack power and environment check and alarm.
Checking and controlling the fan.
PWRD reports the monitoring information to ROMB via RS485 and give indications via
panel indicators of power distribution box.
6-77
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.18.3 PWRD Board Panel

The structure of PWRD board panel is shown in Figure 6-47.
Figure 6-47 PWRD Board Panel
6.18.4 PWRD Board DIP Switches

The PWRD board DIP switches are described in Table 6-75.
Table 6-75 PWRD Board DIP Switches
DIP
Purpose
Description
Default Location
Switch
Mode
1 (up)
4 (do-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
wn)
S2
SWITCH
(set com-
(ON)
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
munication
address
for 485
and OMP;
(OFF)
use 4-digit
switch to
S3
set the adCONFIG

dresses of
Debugging Mode
Switch
0-15)
(set the
mode to
be "normal"
or "debug",
the default
setting is
"normal")
6-78
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.18.5 PWRD Board Jumper

The PEM board provides a 2*5 pin as the 485 signal jumper X8. When multiple racks are
deployed in RNC, the 485 bus of PWRD board should be configured according to the racks
location.
1. When the PWRD board is connected to the end of the 485 bus, a resistance ending is
needed. Just short connect the 1-2 pins and the 9-10 pins.
2. When the PWRD board is at the middle location of the 485 bus, the 485 signal must
be sent to the output port by short connecting the 3-4 pins and the 7-8 pins.
The default set is as shown in Figure 6-48.
Figure 6-48 PWRD Jumper (Default Set)
6.18.6 PWRD Board Interfaces

PWRD board interfaces are shown in Table 6-76.
Table 6-76 PWRD Board Interfaces
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
PWRDB Panel
RS-485
Bi-directional
Plug in the RS485 port

on the previous rack or
PD485 on RMPB.
RS-485
Bi-directional
Used for cascade

connection via RS485
on the next rack.
6-79
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
SENSORS
Bi-directional
Monitoring interface to
connect with sensors
for smoke, infrared,
temperature/humidity
and equipment room
access control.
DOOR
Input
Monitoring interface to
connect with cabinet
room access control.
FANBO X1
Bi-directional
FANBO X2
Bi-directional
FANBO X3
Bi-directional
FANBO X4
Bi-directional
ARRESTER
Input
ARRESTER
Input
INPUT (I)
Input
RS485 monitoring
interface to connect
with 4 fan box.
Lightening arrestor
interface
2 paths of -48 V power
input
INPUT (II)
Input
2 paths of -48 V power

input
OUTPUT
Output
-48 V output to rack

bus bar
6.18.7 PWRD Board Configuration Requirements

PWRD board configuration requirements are as follows:
1.
PWRD is installed at the front of the power distribution box at cabinet top. There is
no associated rear board.
2. PWRDB board provides PWRD board with the interface to receive the environmental
monitoring signals. PWRDB board is located at the back of the power distribution
subrack.
3. One PWRD for each rack.
6.19 POSI Board

6.19.1 POSI Board Definition
The POSI is the POS interface board of RNC.
6-80
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.19.2 Functions
Connected with different subcard, POSI can provide one channel of 622 M STM-4 interface
access or two channels of 155 M STM-1 interface access.
6.19.3 Panel
The structure of POSI panel is as shown in Figure 6-49.
Figure 6-49 POSI PANEL
6.19.4 Indicators
There are five LED indicators on POSI panel, as shown in Table 6-77.
6-81
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-77 LED INDICATOR ON POSI PANEL

LED
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
Indicator
SD
Green
Description
Board plugging
Common indicators. Refer to section 5.3, Common
indicator
Indicators.
M/S status
indicator
Optical signal
ON: The optical board receives optical signals.
indicator
OFF: The optical board does not receive optical signals.
6.19.5 Buttons
The buttons on POSI panel are as shown in Table 6-78.
Table 6-78 BUTTON ON POSI PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
Manual switch for M/S POSI switchover
6.19.6 Interfaces
The interfaces on POSI panel are as shown in Table 6-79.
Table 6-79 INTERFACE ON POSI PANEL
Location
POSI
panel
Interface
Name
TX~RX
Direction
Description
TX: Output
The front board leads out the fiber, connecting with the
RX: Input
external system (STM-1 interface or STM-4 interface)

The backplane connection of POSI is as shown in Table 6-80.
6-82
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-80 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF POSI

Location
Interface Name
Direction
Description
1 100 M control
Bi-direc-
The backplane connects the control plane of the
plane Ethernet
tional
switching unit UIMU.
1 1 G user plane
Bi-direc-
The backplane connects the user plane of the
Ethernet
tional
switching unit UIMU.
Backplane

POSI occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 6-50.
Figure 6-50 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF POSI
6.19.9 Reliability
POSI supports non backup mode and 1:1 backup mode.
6.19.10 Rear Board

POSI does not have the rear board.
6.20 PSN Board

6.20.1 PSN Board Definition
The PSN is the PS network board of RNC.
6.20.2 Functions
PSN exchanges the packet data between GLI. It is a matrix switching system, performing
the switching together with queue engine on GLI. The max exchanging capacity of PSN is
40 G.
The principle of the PSN is as show in Figure 6-51
6-83
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-51 The Schematic Diagram of the PSN
PSN board is composed of the following three units:

1. CPU unit, which connects with the UIMC of the switching shelf through FE to implement
operation and maintenance. It also connects with the matrix switching unit through the
internal control bus to implement the basic configuration and management.
2. Logical unit, which implements the logical adaptation in the board.
3. Matrix switching unit, which provides high-speed serial link to the external devices. It
connects with GLI to make a data switching channel.
Description of the data flow of the board: The data from each GLI board is sent to the
matrix switching unit through the high-speed serial links on the backboard. It is switched
and then sent to the destination GLI board.
6.20.3 Panel
The structure of PSN panel is as shown in Figure 6-52.
6-84
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-52 PSN PANEL
6.20.4 Indicators
There are four LED indicators on PSN panel, as shown in Table 6-81.
Table 6-81 LED INDICATOR ON PSN PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6.20.5 Buttons
The buttons on PSN panel are as shown in Table 6-82.
6-85
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-82 BUTTON ON PSN PANEL

Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S exchange switch
6.20.6 Interfaces
The interfaces on PSN panel are as shown in Table 6-83.
Table 6-83 INTERFACE ON PSN PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
1 100 M
Bi-directional
16 8 M HW
Bi-directional
Backplane
Description
The backplane connects the UIMC on the local
shelf.
The backplane connects the peer board, M/S.

PSN occupies one slot on the switching shelf, as shown in Figure 6-53.
Figure 6-53 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF PSN
6.20.8 Reliability
PSN supports the load sharing.
6.20.9 Rear Board

PSN does not have the rear board. Insert a blank panel on the corresponding slot.
6.20.10 PSN CPU Alarms

PSN CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-84.
6-86
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-84 PSN CPU Alarms

198005
Board
Nam-
390 A
CPMo-
th-
S-
er-
u-
bo-
b-
ard
ca-
198005379
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198002561
Board
Excess
Doesn't
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
ture of CPU
is in Reset
on Board
Status for a
Long Time
rd
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
P-
PS-
S-
N4
P-
PS-
S-
N4
V/2
6.21 RCB Board

6.21.1 RCB Board Definition
The RCB is the control plane processing board of RNC.
6.21.2 Types and Functions

RCB falls into the following two types:
l
When RCB serves as RCP (RNC Control plane Processor), it processes the control
plane signaling, No. 7 signaling, and GPS positioning that correspond to Iu, Iub, Iur,
and Uu interfaces.
When RCB serves as RSP (RNC Signaling Processor), it processes the IP signaling
protocol on Iu, Iub and Uu interfaces.
The principle of the RCB is shown in Figure 6-54
6-87
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-54 The Schematic Diagram of the RCB
RCB board is composed of three units:

1. CPU unit. The board has two set of CPU units: CPU unit A and CPU unit B.
Each CPU unit provides control plane FE electrical interface, active/standby board
communication FE electrical interface, and RS232/RS485 interfaces to communicate
with other units. CPU_A is at the bottom of the board and implements the main
control function of the board.
2. Logical unit, which implements all logical processing functions.
3. Power management unit, which implements power management and distribution.
6.21.3 Panel
The structure of RCB panel is as shown in Figure 6-55.
6-88
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-55 RCB PANEL
6.21.4 Indicators
There are twelve LED indicators on RCB panel, as shown in Table 6-85.
Table 6-85 LED INDICATOR ON RCB PANEL
LED
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
ENUM
Yellow
Board plugging indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
Indicator
Description
Flashing at 5 Hz (quick): It indicates that the

HD1
Red
Harddisk indicator 1
harddisk 1 is running (available to ROMB but

unavailable to RCB)
6-89
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED
Indicator
Color
ALM2
Red
RUN2
Green
ACT2
Green
ENUM2
Yellow
Meaning
Description
CPU_B subsystem
alarm indicator
CPU_B subsystem
running indicator
CPU_B subsystem M/S
Common Indicators.
indicator
CPU_B subsystem
plugging indicator
HD2
Red
Flashing at 5 Hz (quick): It indicates that the

harddisk 2 is running.
6.21.5 Buttons
The buttons on RCB panel are as shown in Table 6-86.
Table 6-86 BUTTON ON RCB PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
M/S handover switch for CPU_A.
EXCH1
Handed over with the same series of CPU on the

adjacent board.
M/S handover switch for CPU_B.
EXCH2
Handed over with the same series of CPU on the

adjacent board.

1. The DIP switches and jumpers on RCB panel are as shown in Figure 6-56.
6-90
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-56 DIP SWITCHES AND JUMPERS ON RCB PANEL
2. The description of DIP switches on RCB panel is as shown in Table 6-87.

Table 6-87 DIP SWITCHES ON RCB PANEL
DIP
Pur-
Description
Switch
pose
Mode
Default Location
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
33 W
resistance
S1
For de-
pulldown
bugging
47 W
resistance
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
pullup
3. The description of the jumpers on RCB panel is as shown in Table 6-88.

Table 6-88 JUMPERS ON RCB PANEL
Jumper
X5
X6
Purpose
To charge the battery for the
north bridge of CPU_B.

north bridge of CPU_A.
Description
Default Location
1-2: In normal operation status.

2-3: Clearing CMOS message.
Connecting 1 with 2
Feet pin on the board.

Connecting 1 with 2

6-91
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Jumper
Purpose
Description
Default Location
X18
Debugging serial port for CPU_A
Unused
X21
Debugging serial port for CPU_B
Unused
X27
POSTSET0
POSTSET0 foot level of FPGA.
Short circuited
X28
POSTSET1
Short circuited
6.21.7 Interfaces
The interfaces on RCB panel are as shown in Table 6-89.
Table 6-89 INTERFACE ON RCB PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
USB1
Bi-directional
USB2
Bi-directional
USB interface for

CPU_A, used.
ROMB panel
USB interface for
CPU_B, unused.

The backplane connection of RCB is as shown in Table 6-90.
Table 6-90 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF RCB
Location
Interface Name
Direction
Description
Bi-directional
The backplane
Ethernet
plane port of UIMU.
Backplane
2 100 M M/S
connection Ethernet
Bi-directional
M/S boards
interconnect on the
backplane.

RCB occupies one slot on the control shelf, as shown in Figure 6-57.
6-92
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-57 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCB
6.21.10 Reliability
RCB supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6.21.11 Rear Board

RCB has no rear board. Instead, it has a blank panel in the corresponding slot.
6.21.12 RCB CPU Alarms

RCB CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-91.
Table 6-91 RCB CPU Alarms
198005
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
390 A
198005379
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198002561
Board
Excess
Doesn't
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
ture of CPU
is in Reset
on Board
Status for a
Long Time
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
M-
FS-
R-
P-
C-
X-
86
/2
2G
Memory
each
CPU
6.22 ROMB Board

6.22.1 ROMB Board Definition
The ROMB is the O&M processing board of RNC.
6-93
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.22.2 Functions
ROMB performs the following functions:
l
l
Serving as a master processing module and performing the global processing of

ZXWR RNC
Serving as a ZXWR RNC O&M agent, managing board statuses, collecting
information, and maintaining global static data. In addition, OMCR communicates
with the system devices through ROMB.
RPU that is in charge of the route protocol processing can run on ROMB.
The principle of the ROMB is shown in Figure 6-58

Figure 6-58 The Schematic Diagram of the ROMB
ROMB board is composed of three units:

1. CPU unit. The board has two sets of CPU units: CPU unit A and CPU unit
B. Each CPU unit provides control plane FE electrical interface, active/standby
board communication FE electrical interface, and RS232 and RS485 interfaces to
communicate with other units. CPU_A is at the bottom of the board and implements
the main control function of the board.
3. Power management unit, which implements power management and distribution.
6.22.3 Panel
The structure of ROMB panel is as shown in Figure 6-59.
6-94
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-59 ROMB PANEL
6.22.4 Indicators
There are twelve LED indicators on ROMB panel, as shown in Table 6-92.
Table 6-92 LED INDICATORS ON ROMB PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6-95
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
Flashing at 5 Hz
(quick): It indicates
HD1
Red
that the harddisk 1 is

running (available to
ROMB but unavailable
to RCB)
ALM2
Red
RUN2
Green
CPU_B subsystem
alarm indicator
CPU_B subsystem
running indicator
Common indicators.
ACT2
Green
ENUM2
Yellow
CPU_B subsystem M/S
Common Indicators.
indicator
CPU_B subsystem
plugging indicator
Flashing at 5 Hz
HD2
Red
(quick): It indicates
that the harddisk 2 is
running.
ON: OMC network
OMC1
Green
OMC network interface
interface 1 has been
indicator 1
connected (only
available to ROMB).
ON: OMC network
OMC2
Green
OMC network interface
interface 2 has been
indicator 2
connected (only
available to ROMB).
6.22.5 Buttons
The buttons on ROMB panel are as shown in Table 6-93.
Table 6-93 BUTTON ON ROMB PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
Active/standby CPU_A changeover switch that
EXCH1
enables changeovers with the same series of

CPUs on adjacent boards.
6-96
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Button
Description
Active/standby CPU_B changeover switch that
EXCH2
enables changeovers with the same series of

CPUs on adjacent boards.

1. The DIP switches and jumpers on ROMB panel are as shown in Figure 6-60.
Figure 6-60 DIP SWITCH AND JUMPER ON ROMB PANEL
2. The description of the DIP switches on ROMB panel is as shown in Table 6-94.
Table 6-94 DIP SWITCH ON ROMB PANEL
DIP S
Purpos
Description
witch
Mode
Default Location
1
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
33 W
resistance
S1
For de-
pulldown
bugging
47 W
resistance
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
pullup
3. The description of the jumpers on ROMB panel is as shown in Table 6-95.

6-97
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-95 JUMPER ON ROMB PANEL

Jumper
X5
X6
Purpose
Description

north bridge of CPU_B.
Default Location

Connecting 1 with 2

north bridge of CPU_A.

Connecting 1 with 2
X18
Debugging serial port for CPU_A
Unused
X21
Debugging serial port for CPU_B
Unused
X27
POSTSET0
Short circuited
X28
POSTSET1
Short circuited
6.22.7 Interfaces
The interfaces on ROMB panel are as shown in Table 6-96.
Table 6-96 INTERFACE ON ROMB PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
USB1
Bi-directional
USB2
Bi-directional
USB interface for

CPU_A, used.
Front board
USB interface for
CPU_B, unused.
Connecting the
Ethernet
Bi-directional
backplane with the

control plane port on
UIMC.
Backplane
2 100 M M/S
connection Ethernet
Bi-directional
Connecting M/S board

Connecting CLKG and
1 485 interface
Bi-directional
PWRD through the

backplane.

The backplane connection of ROMB is as shown in Table 6-97.
6-98
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-97 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF ROMB

Location
Interface Name
Direction
Description
Connecting the

Ethernet
Bi-directional
backplane with the

control plane port on
UIMC.
Backplane
2 100 M M/S
connection Ethernet
Bi-directional
Connecting M/S board

Connecting CLKG and
1 485 interface
Bi-directional
PWRD through the

backplane.

ROMB occupies one slot on the control shelf, as shown in Figure 6-61.
Figure 6-61 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF ROMB
6.22.10 Reliability
ROMB supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6.22.11 Rear Board

The rear board of ROMB is RMPB.
6.22.12 ROMB CPU Alarms

ROMB CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-98.
6-99
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-98 ROMB CPU Alarms

198005
CPBoard
Name
U
Mot-
S-
herb-
u-
oard
bca-
198005
Other
S-
Explana-
ub-
tion
198005379
389 A
1980025
198002561
Board
(CPU)
60 Board
Excess
Doesn't
Subcard
CPU
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
Is Online,
over-
ture of CPU
is in Reset
but Is not
loaded
on Board
Status for a
Config-
Long Time
ured in
cards
rd
Database
390 A
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online,
but Has
Been
Configured by
Database
R-
MP-
O-
X86
MB
/2
FS-
Elec-
tronic
Disk
6.23 RUB Board

6.23.1 RUB Board Definition
The RUB is the user plane processing board of RNC.
6.23.2 Functions
RUB deals with the radio user plane protocols, including CS service
FP/MAC/RLC/IUUP/RTP/RTCP protocol stack and PS service FP/MAC/RLC/PDCP/IUUP,
GTP-U protocols.
The principle of the RUB is shown in Figure 6-62
6-100
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-62 The Schematic Diagram of the RUB
RUB board is composed of six units:

1. Circuit switching unit, which connects the serial ports of multiple-chip DSP with the
circuit switching network.
2. CPU unit, which manages the board and processes the signals from the Abis interface.
It provides the control plane FE interface externally.
3. DSP unit, which includes multiple DSP chips. It implements the functions of
transcoding, rate adaptation or data packet conversions.
4. Ethernet switching unit, which implements the Ethernet connections for multiple-chip
DSP and provides the user plane FE interface externally.
5. Clock unit, which provides necessary clock signals for the units on the board.
Uplink and downlink data streams is opposite in directions. Take uplink as an example:
1. For BIPB, the board receives TDM data from the Abis interface. The circuit switching
unit distributes the data to DSP unit for conversions to IP packets, which are sent to
other function boards through the Ethernet.
2. For DRTB, the interface unit receives audio IP packets from the user plane Ethernet.
The packets are distributed to DSP for transcoding and rate adaptation and then
transforms to PCM code streams which are switched to the trunk board through
UIMU.
6-101
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
3. For TIPB, the user plane data from UIM board is distributed to DSP unit through the
Ethernet switching unit for conversion to TDM data and then is sent to other function
boards for processing.
6.23.3 Types
RUB falls into the following two types:
1. RUB (VTCD physical board): The backplane user plane port supports one FE
interface.
This type of RUB provides an array consisting of fourteen DSP, performing the user
plane protocol processing.
2. RUB (VTCD/2 physical board): The backplane user plane port supports one FE
interface and one GE interface. The intercommunication data traffic is very large.
This type of RUB supports three subcards. Each subcard provides an array consisting
of five DSP, performing the user plane protocol processing.
6.23.4 Panel
The structures of the two types of RUB are same, as shown in Figure 6-63.
6-102
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-63 RUB PANEL
6.23.5 Indicators
There are four LED indicators on RUB panel, as shown in Table 6-99.
Table 6-99 LED INDICATOR ON RUB PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6.23.6 Buttons
The buttons on RUB panel are as shown in Table 6-100.
6-103
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-100 BUTTON ON RUB PANEL

Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
6.23.7 Interfaces
The interfaces on RUB panel (with VTCD physical board) are as shown in Table 6-101.
Table 6-101 INTERFACE ON RUB PANEL (VTCD)
Location
Interface
Direction

Ethernet
Description
The backplane
Bi-directional

plane port of UIMU.
Backplane
2 100 user plane
Ethernet
The backplane
Bi-directional
connects the user

plane port of UIMU.
The interfaces on RUB panel (with VTCD/2 physical board) are as shown in Table 6-102.
Table 6-102 INTERFACE ON RUB PANEL (VTCD/2)
Location
Interface
Direction

Ethernet
Backplane
Description
The backplane
Bi-directional

plane port of UIMC.
2 100 user plane

Ethernet
The backplane
Bi-directional
connects the user

plane port of UIMC.
1 GE user plane
Ethernet
The backplane
Bi-directional
connects the user

plane port of GUIM.

RUB occupies one slot, as shown in Figure 6-64.
6-104
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-64 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RUB
6.23.9 Reliability
RUB supports non backup mode and load sharing mode.
6.23.10 Rear Board

RUB has no rear board. Instead, it has a blank panel in the corresponding slot.
6.23.11 RUB CPU Alarms

RUB CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-103.
Table 6-103 RUB CPU Alarms
Board
Name
RUB
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
VTCD
D-
1980053
Other
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
198002561
Excess
Temperature
of CPU on
Board
rds
19800538
Doesn't
9 A (CPU)
Exist/
Subcard
CPU is
Is Online,
in Re-
but Is not
set Sta-
Config-
tus for
ured in
a Long
Database
Time
198005390
A (CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online, but
Has Been
Configured
by
Database
Based on
85
C64X
41
V-
1980025
79 Board
VT-
R-
T-
D-
D-
U-
C-
85
S3
D/
41
Based on
Himalaya
6-105
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.24 SBCX Board

6.24.1 SBCX Board Definition
The SBCX is the X86 server board of RNC.
6.24.2 Functions
SBCX performs the following functions:
l
l
l
Storing the log

Storing the performance data.
Local NM of the RNS.
The principle of the SBCX is as show in Figure 6-65

Figure 6-65 The Schematic Diagram of the SBCX
SBCX board is composed of the following five units:

1. CPU dual-core system, which includes CPU, memory controller and primary storage
system.
2. Peripheral interface unit, which provides multiple kind of interfaces, such as PS/2, USB
and VGA.
3. External interface unit, which provides 4 FE interfaces and 2 GE interfaces.
4. SAS controller, which provides SAS hard disk interface and implements SAS RAID
0/1.
5. SAS hard disk which is in charge of the service data storage.
6-106
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.24.3 Indices
The indices of SBCX are as shown in Table 6-104.
Table 6-104 INDICES OF SBCX
Item
Processor
Memory
Configuration
Based on Sossaman dualcore processor and the master frequency is
2 GHz.
The memory supports 2~8 GB and it can be expanded to 16 GB.
It provides two SAS harddisks based on RAID1.
Harddisk
The capacity is 73~146 GB and it supports the hot-plugging. It provides

one reliable local SATA harddisk, with the capacity of 40 GB.
OS
External devices
It supports Windows XP/2000/2003/ Linux series and Soloris

commercial OS.
It provides the keyboard, mouse, and MML interface on the monitor.
6.24.4 Panel
The structure of SBCX panel is as shown in Figure 6-66.
6-107
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-66 SBCX PANEL
6.24.5 Indicators
There are fourteen LED indicators on SBCX panel, indicating the running statuses of the
CPU, network interface, power supply, and the harddisk. Their descriptions are as shown
in Table 6-105.
Table 6-105 LED INDICATOR ON SBCX PANEL
LED
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Indicator
Description

Board plugging
ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
HD
Green
Harddisk indicator
Common Indicators.
indicator

ON: Do not plug/unplug the board.
6-108
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED
Color
Meaning
PWR
Green
Power indicator
SAS1
Green
ALM1
Yellow
Indicator
ACT
Green
Description
ON: The board 5 V and 3.3 V are normal.
SAS harddisk 1
running indicator
ON: The harddisk is running normally.
SAS harddisk 1
alarm indicator

OFF: There are no alarm indications on the
harddisk.
FC interface 1
running indicator
ON: The disk array is connected successfully.

SD
Green
FC interface 1 rate
Flashing: There are no connections.
indicator
ON: There is the connection at 2G/4G.

OFF: There is the connection at 1G.
ACT
Green
FC interface 2
running indicator
ON: The disk array is connected successfully.

SD
Green
FC interface 2 rate
Flashing: There are no connections.
indicator
ON: There is the connection at 2G/4G.

OFF: There is the connection at 1G.
SAS2
Green
ALM2
Yellow
SAS harddisk 2
running indicator
ON: The harddisk is running normally.
SAS harddisk 2
alarm indicator
OFF: There are no alarms on the harddisk.
6.24.6 Buttons
The buttons on SBCX panel are as shown in Table 6-106.
Table 6-106 BUTTON ON SBCX PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S handover switch
PWB
The board power supply control switch
ENUM1
SAS harddisk 1ENUM switch
ENUM2
SAS harddisk 2ENUM switch
6-109
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.24.7 SBCX Board Interfaces

The interfaces on SBCX panel are as shown in Table 6-107.
Table 6-107 INTERFACE ON SBCX PANEL
Location
Front board
Interface
Direction
Description
RX1
RX
TX1
TX
RX2
RX
TX2
TX
KB
Bi-directional
Keyboard interface
MS
Bi-directional
Mouse interface
VGA
Bi-directional
Display interface
USB1
Bi-directional
USB interface
USB2
Bi-directional
USB interface
Optical interface,
unavailable
Optical interface,
unavailable
Optical interface,
unavailable
Optical interface,
unavailable

The backplane connection of SBCX is as shown in Table 6-108.
Table 6-108 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF SBCX
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
SBCX panel
1 100 M Ethernet
Bi-directional
The backplane
connects UIMC.

SBCX occupies two slots. The system supports at most three SBCX boards. One is used
for the log management and the other two are used as OMM NM servers, backup for each
other.
When there is only one master control shelf, three SBCX boards can be inserted on the
control shelf simultaneously. It is recommended to inserted on Slot 1, Slot 3, and Slot
5. When there are several control shelves and switching shelves, it is recommended to
insert one SBCX on Slot 1 on the control shelf, for the log management without backup,
and insert the other two SBCX boards on Slot 1 and Slot 2 on the switching shelf, backup
for each other. The configuration is as shown in Figure 6-67.
6-110
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-67 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF SBCX
6.24.10 Reliability
None.
6.24.11 Rear Board

The rear board of SBCX is RSVB.
6.24.12 SBCX CPU Alarms

SBCX CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-109.
Table 6-109 SBCX CPU Alarms
198005
CMBo-
o-
ard
th-
Na-
er-
me
board
PU
Subca-
198005
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198005379
389 A
198002561
Board
(CPU)
Excess
Doesn't
Subcard
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
Is Online,
ture of CPU
is in Reset
but Is not
on Board
Status for a
Config-
Long Time
ured in
rd
Database
390 A
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online,
but Has
Been
Configured by
Database
SBCX
SBCX
SC-
Occupying slot 2
6-111
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.25 SDTA Board

6.25.1 SDTA Board Definition
The SDTA is the ATM optical digital trunk board of RNC.
6.25.2 Function
SDTA provides two CSTM-1 inrerfaces, supporting 126 channels of E1, including IMA and
ATM processing. It does not need to work with APBI. SDTA provides the functions of
CSTM-1 interface access and ATM termination.
The principle of the SDTA is as show in Figure 6-68
Figure 6-68 The Schematic Diagram of the SDTA
SDTA board is composed of the following parts:

1. Optical interface unit, which is composed of optical unit and PHY chip. It implements
the STM-1 access. The four optical interfaces are channelized STM-1 optical interface,
which is different from APBE/APBI. The data through the optical interfaces is sent to
IMAB for processing.
2. ATM layer processing, which controls the cell streams, handover and forwarding.
3. Processing unit of the media plane and control plane including AAL2/5 SAR subsystem
and CPU daughter card. After SAR processing, AAL2/5 SAR subsystem falls into two
parts: media plane cell whose stream is send out directly by AAL2/5 SAR subsystem,
and control plane cell whose stream is processed and sent out by CPU daughter card.
6.25.3 Panel
The structure of SDTA panel is as shown in Figure 6-69.
6-112
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-69 SDTA PANEL
6.25.4 Indicators
There are five LED indicators on SDTA panel, as shown in Table 6-110.
Table 6-110 LED INDICATOR ON SDTA PANEL
LED
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Indicator
Description

ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
Board plugging
Indicators.
indicator
SD
Green
Optical signal
indicator
OFF: The optical board does not receive optical

signals.
6-113
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.25.5 Buttons
The buttons on SDTA panel are as shown in Table 6-111.
Table 6-111 BUTTON ON SDTA PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
Manual switch for M/S SDTA switchover
6.25.6 Interface
The interfaces on SDTA panel are as shown in Table 6-112.
Table 6-112 INTERFACE ON SDTA PANEL
Location
Interface
SDTA
Two pairs of
panel
TxRx
Direction
Description
Tx: Output
The fiber leads out from the front board,
Rx: Input
connecting to the external system (ATM CSTM-1

interface).

The backplane connection of SDTA is as shown in Table 6-113.
Table 6-113 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF SDTA
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
1 100 M control
Bi-directional
The backplane connects the control plane port
Back-
plane Ethernet
plane
1 1 G user plane
of switching unit GUIM.

Bi-directional
Ethernet
The backplane connects the user plane port

of GUIM..

Each SDTA occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 6-70.
Figure 6-70 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF SDTA
6-114
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.25.9 Reliability
SDTA supports non backup mode, 1+1 backup mode, and 1:1 backup mode.
6.25.10 Rear Board

When SDTA is set to extract 8 K base clock from the CN at Iu interface, the rear board is
RGIM1. Otherwise, insert a blank panel.
6.25.11 SDTA CPU Alarms

SDTA CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-114.
Table 6-114 SDTA CPU Alarms
MotBoard Name
herboard
SDTA
198005
CPU
Subca-
198005
390 A
389 A
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198005379
(CPU)
198002561
Board
Subcard
Excess
Doesn't
Is On-
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
line, but
ture of CPU
is in Reset
Is not
on Board
Status for a
Config-
Long Time
ured in
rd
Data-
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online,
but Has
Been
Configured by
Data-
base
IM-
2CST-
A-
M-1, in-
D-
D-
T-
85
ES,
tegrated
41
SD-
interface
TS
board
base
6.26 SDTA2 Board

6.26.1 SDTA2 Board Definition
The SDTA2 is the ATM optical digital trunk board 2 of RNC.
6.26.2 SDTA2 Board Function

The SDTA2 board provides the CSTM-1 interface to the RNC system and performs
IMA/ATM processing.
6-115
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.26.3 SDTA2 Board Panel Structure Diagram

The SDTA2 board panel structure diagram is shown in Figure 6-71.
Figure 6-71 SDTA2 Board Panel Structure Diagram
6.26.4 SDTA2 Board Panel Indicator

The indicators on the SDTA2 board are shown in Table 6-115.
Table 6-115 SDTA2 Board Panel Indicator
Indicator
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Operation Indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm Indicator
ENUM
Yellow
Removal Indicator
ACT
Green
M/S Indicator
Explanation
Common
Indicators.

Common Indicators.
6-116
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Indicator
Color
Meaning
Explanation
Special Indicator
When the optical
interface is master
ACT
Green
Optical Interface M/S
(active) the ACT
Indicator
indicator is ON is
shown in When it is
slave (standby) the
ACT indicator is OFF.
When the fiber optics is
SD
Green
Fiber Optics Plugged
plugged the SD indica-
Indicator
tor is ON, otherwise, it

is OFF.
6.26.5 SDTA2 Board Panel Keys

The SDTA2 board panel keys are shown in Table 6-116.
Table 6-116 SDTA2 Board Panel Keys
Name
Explanation
EXCH
M/S SDTA2 Mannual Switch
RST
Reset Switch
6.26.6 SDTA2 Board Panel Interface

The SDTA2 board panel interface is shown in Table 6-117.
Table 6-117 SDTA2 Board Panel Interface
Location
Front
Panel
Board
SDTA2
Interface
4 pairs of TX~RX
Direction
Explanation
TX: output
Provides 4 CSTM-1 op-
RX: input
tical interfaces
6.26.7 SDTA2 Board Back Plane Connection

The SDTA2 board back plane connection is as shown in Table 6-118.
6-117
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-118 SDTA2 Board Back Plane Connection

Location
Interface
1100M Control Plane
Ethernet
Direction
Explanation
The back plane is con-
Bidirection
nected to the GUIM

control plane
Back Plane
11G User Plane Ethernet
The back plane is conBidirection
nected to the GUIM

user plane
6.26.8 SDTA2 Board Configuration Requirement

Each SDTA2 board takes 1 slot which could be on the Gigabit resource shelf and located
from left to right. It could mix with APBE, GIPI3, GIPI4, SDTI, DTI or DTA. The slots
available are shown in Figure 6-72.
Figure 6-72 SDTA2 Board Configuration Diagram
6.26.9 SDTA2 Board Reliability

The SDTA2 board supports 1:1 backup.
6.26.10 The rear board of the SDTA2 board

The SDTA2 board has no rear board
6.26.11 SDTA2 CPU Alarms

SDTA2 CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-119.
6-118
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-119 SDTA2 CPU Alarms

198005
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
198005
390 A
389 A
198005379
(CPU)
198002561
Board
Subcard
Excess
Doesn't
Is On-
Temperature
Exist/ CPU
line, but
of CPU on
is in Reset
Is not
Board
Status for a
Config-
Long Time
ured in
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
Data-
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online,
but Has
Been
Configured by
Data-
base
base
IMSDTA2
D-
D-
T-
85
41
AES/2,
SDTS/
optical
interface
6.27 SDTB2 Board

6.27.1 SDTB2 Board Definition
The SDTB2 is the optical digital trunk board 2 of RNC.
6.27.2 Functions
SDTB2 implements the following functions:
l
l
Implementing two channels of SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3 access.

Supporting 126*E1 or 168*T1 multiplexing/de-multiplexing.
The principle of the SDTB2 is as show in Figure 6-73
6-119
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-73 The Schematic Diagram of the SDTB2
SDTB2 board is composed of the following units:

1. Control unit, which implements the board management and internal connection control.
2. Interface unit, which connects with the switching unit and provides STM-1 interface
functions.
3. Circuit switching unit, which implements the switching function to the circuit HW of the
interface unit.
4. Logical processing unit, which implements the logical switching and adaptation in the
board.
5. Clock processing unit, which receives the clock reference from the system clock board
and provides the clock reference signals obtained from STM-1.
6.27.3 Panel
The structure of SDTB2 panel is as shown in Figure 6-74.
6-120
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-74 SDTB2 PANEL
6.27.4 Indicators
There are five LED indicators on SDTB2 panel, as shown in Table 6-120.
Table 6-120 LED INDICATOR ON SDTB2 PANEL
LED
Indicator
Color
RUN
Green
ALM
Red
Meaning
Description
Running
indicator
Alarm indicator
ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
Board plugging
Indicators.
indicator
M/S status
indicator
6-121
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED
Color
Indicator
SD
Meaning
Description
Optical signal
Green
indicator
OFF: The optical board does not receive optical signals.
6.27.5 Buttons
The buttons on SDTB2 panel are as shown in Table 6-121.
Table 6-121 BUTTON ON SDTB PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
Manual switch for M/S SDTB2 switchover
6.27.6 Interfaces
The interfaces on SDTB2 panel are as shown in Table 6-122.
Table 6-122 INTERFACE ON SDTB2 PANEL
Location
Interface
Name
Direction
Description
SDTB2
Two pairs of
TX: Output
The front board leads out the fiber, connecting with
panel
TX~RX
RX: Input
the external system (channelized STM-1 interface)

The backplane connection of SDTB2 is as shown in Table 6-123.
Table 6-123 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF SDTB2
Location
Back-
Interface Name
Direction
Description
1 100 M control
Bi-direc-
The backplane connects the control plane FE
plane Ethernet
tional
port of the switching unit UIMU.
plane
16 8 M HW bus
Bi-directional
The backplane connects the switching unit UIMU.

SDTB2 occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 6-75.
6-122
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-75 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF SDTB2
6.27.9 Reliability
SDTB2 supports non backup mode and 1:1 backup mode.
6.27.10 Rear Board

When SDTB2 is set to extract 8 K base clock from CN at Iu interface, the rear board is
RGIM1. Otherwise, insert a blank panel.
6.27.11 SDTB2 CPU Alarms

SDTB2 CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-124.
Table 6-124 SDTB2 CPU Alarms
198005
CPU
Boa-
Mot-
S-
rd N-
herb-
u-
ame
oard
bca-
198005
390 A
389 A
Other
S-
Explana-
ub-
tion
198005379
(CPU)
1980025
198002561
Board
Subcard
60 Board
Excess
Doesn't
Is On-
CPU
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
line, but
over-
ture of CPU
is in Reset
Is not
loaded
on Board
Status for a
Config-
Long Time
ured in
cards
rd
Data-
(CPU)
Subcard
Is not
Online,
but Has
Been
Configured by
Data-
base
SD-
SDT-
TB2
B/2
base
Supporting Optical Inter-
face 2
6.28 SDTI Board

6.28.1 SDTI Board Definition
The SDTI is the digital IP optical trunk board of RNC.
6-123
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.28.2 SDTI Board Function

The SDTI board provides the CSTM-1 interface to the RNC system and performs
HDLC/PPP processing.
6.28.3 SDTI Board Panel Structure Diagram

The SDTI board panel structure diagram is as shown in Figure 6-76.
Figure 6-76 SDTI Board Panel Structure Diagram
6.28.4 SDTI Board Panel Indicator

The indicators on the SDTI board are shown in Table 6-125.
6-124
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-125 SDTI Board Panel Indicator

Indicator
Color
Meaning
Explanation
RUN
Green
Operation Indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm Indicator
ENUM
Yellow
Removal Indicator
ACT
Green
M/S Indicator
Common
indicators.

Common Indicators.
Special Indicator
When the optical
interface is master
ACT
Green
Optical Interface M/S
(active) the ACT
Indicator
indicator is ON is
shown in When it is
slave (standby) the
ACT indicator is OFF.
When the fiber optics is
SD
Green
Fiber Optics Plugged
plugged the SD indica-
Indicator
tor is ON, otherwise, it

is OFF.
6.28.5 SDTI Board Panel Keys

SDTI board panel key is shown in Table 6-126.
Table 6-126 SDTI board panel key
Name
Explanation
EXCH
M/S SDTI Manual Switch
RST
Reset Switch
6.28.6 SDTI Board Panel Interface

SDTI board panel interface is shown in Table 6-127.
Table 6-127 SDTI board panel interface
location
front board SDTI panel
interface
2 pairs of TX~RX
direction
Explanation
TX: output
Providing two CSTM-1
RX: input
optical interfaces
6-125
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.28.7 SDTI Board Back Plane Connection

The SDTI board back plane connection is shown in Table 6-128.
Table 6-128 SDTI Board Back Plane Connection
location
interface
1100M control plane
Ethernet
direction
Explanation
The back plane con-
Bidirection
nects to the control

plane
back plane
11G user plane Ethernet
The back plane conBidirection
nects to the GUIM user

plane
6.28.8 SDTI Board Configuration Requirement

One slot is used by the SDTI board. It could be on the Gigabit resource shelf. The board
is configured from left to right, and could be mixed with the APBE, GIPI3, GIPI4, SDTA2,
DTI or DTA. The slots available are shown in Figure 6-77.
Figure 6-77 SDTI Board Configuration Diagram
6.28.9 SDTI Board Reliability

The SDTI board supports 1: 1 backup.
6.28.10 The Rear Board of the SDTI Board

There is no rear board for the SDTI board.
6.28.11 SDTI CPU Alarms

SDTI CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-129.
6-126
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-129 SDTI CPU Alarms

198005
Board
Name
M-
C-
o-
P-
th-
e-
S-
r-
u-
b-
b-
o-
c-
a-
a-
rd
rd
390 A
198005379
Other
1980025
S-
Explana-
60 Board
ub-
tion
CPU over-
ca-
loaded
rds
198002561
Board
Excess
Doesn't
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
ture of CPU
is in Reset
on Board
Status for a
Long Time
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
SDTI
DTI
SD-
2CSTM-1
TS
, Inte-
grated In-
terface
Board
6.29 THUB Board

6.29.1 THUB Board Definition
The THUB is the trunk interconnecting board of RNC.
6.29.2 Functions
In an RNC system, the THUB enables control-plane convergence between all shelves and
the control shelf or switching shelf. However, the THUB cannot be used in FE resource
shelf.
Resource shelves are connected with the THUB through two FE interfaces (control
stream). The THUB is connected with the UIMC board in the local shelf through GE
electrical interface.
The capacity of shelves can be expanded by adding FE trunks. Further capacity expansion
can be achieved by connecting the GE optical interface to the GE switch.
The operating principle of the THUB is shown in Figure 6-78
6-127
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-78 Operating Principle of the THUB
The THUB consists of the following three units:

1. CPU, which connects with the logic unit and the Ethernet switching unit through control
bus and is used to configure the switching chip. The CPU also provides RS232 and
RS485 serial ports externally for debugging.
2. Logic unit, which provides all logic processing functions.
3. Ethernet switching unit, which provides Ethernet switching and control-plane
convergence functions.
Data flow of the THUB board:
1. The control-plane data from all shelves is sent to the Ethernet switching unit of the
THUB.
2. The data is sent to the UIMC board in the control shelf through GE and is then
distributed to the CMP board for processing.
6.29.3 Panel
The structure of THUB panel is as shown in Figure 6-79.
6-128
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-79 THUB PANEL
6.29.4 Indicators
There are fifty LED indicators on THUB panel, as shown in Table 6-130.
Table 6-130 LED INDICATOR ON THUB PANEL
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Common indicators.
Yellow
Board plugging
ENUM
indicator
Common Indicators.
ACT
Green
6-129
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
LED Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
ON: The corresponding
control plane cascading
L1 ~ L46
Green
46 channels of control
interface is connected.
plane cascading
OFF: The
interface state indicator
corresponding
control plane
cascading interface
is disconnected.
6.29.5 Buttons
The buttons on THUB panel is as shown in Table 6-131.
Table 6-131 BUTTON ON THUB PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S handover switch
6.29.6 Interfaces
There are no interfaces on THUB panel.

The backplane connection of THUB is as shown in Table 6-132.
Table 6-132 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF THUB
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
The backplane
backplane
1 1 G Ethernet
Bi-directional
connects the UIMC

on the control shelf.

THUB occupies one slot on the control shelf with ROMB, as shown in Figure 6-80.
6-130
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 6-80 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF THUB
6.29.9 Reliability
THUB supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6.29.10 Rear Board

The rear board of THUB is:
l
l
RCHB1
RCHB2
RCHB1 works simultaneously with RCHB2, providing forty-six external 100 M Ethernet
interfaces for THUB.
6.29.11 THUB CPU Alarms

THUB CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-133.
Table 6-133 THUB CPU Alarms
19800
Board
Name
Mo-
C-
th-
PU
er-
Su-
bo-
bc-
ard
ard
Ot-
1980025
her
S-
Explana-
ub-
tion
198005
5390 A
389 A
(CPU)
198005379
(CPU)
Sub-
Board
Subcard
card
198002561
60 Board
Excess
Doesn't
Is On-
Is not
CPU
Temperature
Exist/ CPU
line, but
Online,
over-
of CPU on
is in Reset
Is not
but Has
loaded
Board
Status for a
Config-
Been
Long Time
ured in
Config-
Data-
ured by
base
Data-
cards
base
TH-
CH-
D8
UB
UB
270
6-131
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.30 UIMC Board

6.30.1 UIMC Board Definition
The UIMC is the universal control interface board of RNC.
6.30.2 Functions
UIMC performs the following functions:
l
Switching
UIMC performs Ethernet level-2 switching inside the control shelf and the switching
shelf. It also manages the control shelf. UIMC provides an internal GE electrical
interface to cascade CHUB inside the control shelf.
Clock distribution
UIMC provides the clock drive inside the control shelf and the switching shelf
respectively. These shelves input 8 K and 16 M signals. After the phase lock and
drive, the signals are distributed to each slot, providing 16 M and 8 K clock for boards.
The principle of the UIMC is as show in Figure 6-81

Figure 6-81 The Schematic Diagram of the UIMC
UIMU board is composed of the following four units:

1. CPU unit, which connects with the time-slot switching unit, logical unit and ethernet
switching unit. It is in charge of the configuration and management of the switching
unit, logical unit and GE resource shelf.
2. Logical unit, which implements all the logical processing functions.
3. Time-slot switching unit, which has the capability of 16 K circuit switching. It provides
an internal circuit switching network for the GE resource shelf.
6-132
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
4. Ethernet switching unit, which implements the ethernet switching function for the user
plane and control plane of the resource shelf.
1. The external data, which is from each board of the shelf containing the UIMU, goes
into the ethernet switching unit or the time-slot switching unit for switching processing,
and then sent to the destination board.
6.30.3 Panel
The structure of UIMC panel is as shown in Figure 6-82.
Figure 6-82 UIMC PANEL
6.30.4 Indicators
There are fourteen LED indicators on UIMC panel, as shown in Table 6-134.
6-133
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 6-134 LED INDICATOR ON UIMC PANEL

LED
Color
Meaning
RUN
Green
Running indicator
ALM
Red
Alarm indicator
Indicator
Description

ENUM
Yellow
ACT
Green
Board plugging
Indicators.
indicator
LINK1~10
Green
Control plane
ON: The control plane cascading interface 1~10 is
cascading interface
connected.
1~10 status indicator
OFF: The control plane cascading interface 1~10 is

disconnected.
6.30.5 Buttons
The buttons on UIMC panel are as shown in Table 6-135.
Table 6-135 BUTTON ON UIMC PANEL
Button
Description
RST
Reset switch
EXCH
M/S handover switch
6.30.6 Interfaces
There are no interfaces on UIMC panel.

The backplane connection of UIMC is as shown in Table 6-136.
Table 6-136 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF UIMC
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
The backplane
C5~8
Bi-directional

plane port on the board
on other slot.
Backplane
The backplane
C24
Bi-directional
connects the peer

board slot. The
6-134
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
control planes of the
master UIMC and that
of the slave UIMC
interconnects.
The backplane
U1~17
Bi-directional

plane port on the board
on other slot.
1 1 G electric
interface
Bi-directional
The backplane
connects CHUB slot.

UIMC occupies one slot on the control shelf and the switching shelf in M/S mode, as shown
in Figure 6-83.
Figure 6-83 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS OF UIMC
6.30.9 Reliability
UIMC supports the 1+1 hot backup mode.
6.30.10 Rear Board

The rear board of UIMC is:
l
l
RUIM2
RUIM3
6-135
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
6.30.11 UIMC CPU Alarms

UIMC CPU alarms are shown in Table 6-137.
Table 6-137 UIMC CPU Alarms
198005
390 A
Board
Name
Mo-
C-
th-
PU
er-
Su-
bo-
bc-
ard
ard
198005379
Other
S-
Explana-
ub-
tion
1980025
198002561
Board
60 Board
Excess
Doesn't
CPU
Tempera-
Exist/ CPU
over-
ture of CPU
is in Reset
loaded
on Board
Status for a
cards
Long Time
19800538
(CPU)
9 A (CPU)
Subcard
Subcard
Is not
Is Online,
Online,
but Is not
but Has
Config-
Been
ured in
Config-
Database
ured by
Database
UI-
UI-
D8
MC
M/2
270
G-
Used for
CS
BCTC
and
BPSN
6-136
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 7
Rear Boards
Table of Contents
Rear Board Structure .................................................................................................7-1
RCHB1 Board ............................................................................................................7-2
RCHB2 Board ............................................................................................................7-4
RCKG1 Board ............................................................................................................7-6
RCKG2 Board ............................................................................................................7-8
RDTA Board .............................................................................................................7-11
RDTB Board.............................................................................................................7-12
RGER Board ............................................................................................................7-15
RGIM1 Board ...........................................................................................................7-17
RGUM1 Board..........................................................................................................7-19
RGUM2 Board..........................................................................................................7-21
RMNIC Board...........................................................................................................7-23
RMPB Board ............................................................................................................7-25
RSVB Board.............................................................................................................7-27
RUIM2 Board ...........................................................................................................7-29
RUIM3 Board ...........................................................................................................7-31
7.1 Rear Board Structure

The rear board consists of the PCB board, the subcard, and the panel assembly (including
the extractor and EMC spring plate).
The structure of the rear board is as shown in Figure 7-1.
7-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-1 STRUCTURE OF REAR BOARD
1. Extractor
2. Panel of rear board
3. PCB
4. Plug
5. Plug
7.2 RCHB1 Board

7.2.1 RCHB1 Board Definition
The RCHB1 is the CHUB rear board 1 of RNC.
7.2.2 Functions
RCHB1 performs the following functions:
l
l
l
Providing the external interface for THUB, at most 46 100 M Ethernet interface
(eleven groups of 4 FE TRUNK ports)
Providing one 232 debugging serial port
Providing one debugging Ethernet interface
7.2.3 Structure
The structure of RCHB1 panel is as shown in Figure 7-2.
7-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 7 Rear Boards
Figure 7-2 RCHB1 PANEL
7.2.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RCHB1 panel are as shown in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 INTERFACE ON RCHB1 PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
Odd FE1-15
Bi-directional
To connect the user
Odd FE17-31
Bi-directional
plane port of UIM, that

is, the cable connects
the RUIM2, RUIM3,
Odd FE33-45
Bi-directional
RCHB1 panel
RGUM1, and RGUM2

on the control shelf
CPU debugging
DEBUG-FE/232
Bi-directional
interface/serial port,
connected with the
debugging machine

RCHB1 occupies one slot on the control shelf. RCHB1 can be only inserted on Slot 15 on
the rear board of THUB, as shown in Figure 7-3.
7-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-3 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCHB1
7.2.6 Front Board

The front board of RCHB1 is THUB.
7.3 RCHB2 Board

7.3.1 RCHB2 Board Definition
The RCHB2 is the CHUB rear board 2 of RNC.
7.3.2 Functions
RCHB2 performs the following functions:
l
l
l
Providing the external interface for THUB, at most 22 100 M Ethernet interface
7.3.3 Panel
The structure of RCHB2 panel is as shown in Figure 7-4.
7-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-4 RCHB2 PANEL
7.3.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RCHB2 panel are as shown in Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 INTERFACE ON RCHB2 PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
Even FE2-16
Bi-directional
To connect the user
Even FE18-32
Bi-directional
plane port of UIM, that

is, the cable connects
the RUIM2, RUIM3,
Even FE34-46
Bi-directional
RCHB2 panel
RGUM1, and RGUM2

on the control shelf
CPU debugging
DEBUG-FE/232
Bi-directional
interface/serial port,
connected with the
debugging machine

RCHB occupies one slot on the control shelf. RCHB2 can be only inserted on Slot 16 on
the rear board of THUB, as shown in Figure 7-5.
7-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-5 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCHB2
7.3.6 Front Board

The front board of RCHB2 is THUB.
7.4 RCKG1 Board

7.4.1 RCKG1 Board Definition
The RCKG1 is the CLKG rear board 1 of RNC.
7.4.2 Functions
RCKG1 provides six channels of clock output ports and two kinds of clock bases (one
channel of 8 K input and one channel of BITS reference input) and one RS 232 debugging
serial port input interface for CLKG/ICMG/ICM.
7.4.3 Panel
The structure of RCKG1 panel is shown in Figure 7-6.
7-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-6 RCKG1 PANEL
7.4.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RCKG1 panel are shown in Table 7-3.
7-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 7-3 INTERFACE ON RCKG1 PANEL

Location
Interface
Direction
Description
CLKOUT
TX
6Clock output connects the resource shelf, the

control shelf, and the 1 G resource shelf.
One CLKOUT outputs 1-to-6 cable. There are two
UIM on one shelf, using two clock sockets. (One
clock socket provides one channel of 16 M, one
CLKOUT
channel of 8 K and one channel of PP2S signals).
TX
Therefore, one CLKOUT can connect three shelves,

that is, three channels of clock output). RCKG1
RCKG1 panel
contains two CLKOUT that can provide six channels

of clock output, that is, connect six shelves.
8 K base input. When the clock base is provided
8 KIN1
RX
by DTB and SPB, connect 8KOUT/DEBUG-232 on

Rdtb.
RS 232
RX
It is only used during debugging.
BTIS REF
RX
A set of BITS reference clocks input.

RCKG1 occupies one slot on the control shelf. It can be only inserted on the slot with
smaller number on the rear board of CLKG/ICMG/ICM, as shown in Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCKG1
7.4.6 Front Board

The front board of RCKG1 is CLKG/ICMG/ICM.
7.5 RCKG2 Board

7.5.1 RCKG2 Board Definition
The RCKG2 is the CLKG rear board 2 of RNC.
7-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
7.5.2 Functions
RCKG2 provides six channels of clock output ports and two kinds of clock bases (one
channel of RITS reference input) and one RS 232 debugging serial port input interface for
CLKG/ICMG/ICM.
7.5.3 Panel
The structure of RCKG2 panel is shown in Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-8 RCKG2 PANEL
7-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
7.5.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RCKG2 panel are shown in Table 7-4.
Table 7-4 INTERFACE ON RCKG2 PANEL
Location
Interface
Name
CLKOUT
Direction
Description
Tx
6 Clock output connects the resource shelf,

the control shelf, and the 1 G resource shelf.
(One CLKOUT outputs one-to-six cable. One
shelf contains two UIM boards, which use two
clock sockets in all (each clock socket provides
one channel of 16 M, one channel of 8 K, and
CLKOUT
Tx
one channel of PP2S signals). Therefore,

one CLKOUT can connect three shelves, that
RCKG2 panel
is, three channels of clock outputs. RCKG1

contains two CLKOUT, providing six channels
of clock outputs, that is, six shelves).
2 8 K base input. When the clock base is
8 KIN2
Rx
provided by DTB and SPB, it connects with the

8KOUT/DEBUG-232 on the rear board, RDTB.
RS 232
Rx
It is only used during debugging.
BITS REF
Rx
A set of BITS reference clocks input.

RCKG2 occupies one slot. It can be only inserted on the slot with smaller number on the
rear board of CLKG/ICMG/ICM, as shown in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCKG2
7.5.6 Front Board

The front board of RCKG2 is CLKG/ICMG/ICM.
7-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
7.6 RDTA Board

7.6.1 RDTA Board Definition
The RDTA is the rear board of DTA/DTI.
7.6.2 RDTA Board Function

The RDTA board functions are shown below: it provides 32 external E1/T2 physical
interfaces for the DTA board and the DTI board.
7.6.3 RDTA panel structure diagram

RDTA panel structure diagram is shown in Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 RDTA Panel Structure Diagram
7.6.4 RDTA Board Panel Interface

The RDTA board panel interface is as shown in Table 7-5.
7-11
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 7-5 RDTA Board Panel Interface

Location
Interface
Direction
Explanation
The rear board panel
T1/E1 1-16
Bidirection
T1/E1 17-32
Rear
Board
provides 32*T1/E1 interfaces for the external

system.
RDTA
Panel
Introduces 8K clock sig8KOUT/DEBUG-232
Bidirection
nal and serial port test

signal.
DEBUG-FE
Bidirection
Test Network port
7.6.5 RDTA Board Jumper

The default E1 link configuration on the RDTA board is 75 non-balanced coaxial
transmission. If 120 PCM balanced transmission is used, sthe jumper on the rear board
RDTA should be removed.
7.6.6 RDTA Board Configuration Requirement

The RDTA board takes 1 slot which could be on the rear board slot corresponding to
DTA/DTI on the Gigabit resource shelf is shown in Figure 7-11.
Figure 7-11 RDTA Board Configuration Diagram
7.6.7 RDTA board's front board

RDTA board's front board is DTA board and DTI board.
7.7 RDTB Board

7.7.1 RDTB Board Definition
The RDTB is the rear board of RNC's digital trunk board.
7.7.2 Function
RDTB performs the following functions:
7-12
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
l
l
Providing thirty-two E1/T1 physical interfaces for DTB

Providing one clock base interface to connect the clock board for DTB
7.7.3 Panel
The structure of RDTB panel is as shown in Figure 7-12.
Figure 7-12 RDTB PANEL
7.7.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RDTB panel are as shown in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6 INTERFACE ON RDTB PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
T1/E1 1-16
Bi-directional
T1/E1 17-32
provides 32 T1/E1
to connect external
system.
When Iu interface
is connected in E1
RDTB panel
mode, RDTB connect

8KOUT/DEBUG-232
Bi-directional
CLKG/ICMG/ICM.
The debugging serial
port of CPU system can
connect the debugging
machine.
7-13
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
7.7.5 Jumpers
The jumpers on RDTB panel are as shown in Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 JUMPER ON RDTB PANEL
On RDTB, by default, E1 line is configured as 75 non-balanced coaxial transmission

mode. The TX end is connected to the PE through the jumpers. The RX end is connected
with a capacitor and then to the PE through the jumpers. All should be performed by
selecting the jumper location from X9~X16 on RDTB, as shown in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 CONNECTION OF PINS X9~X1
Connection
Description
1-2
Connect E1_TX (N)-R to PE (Channel N)
3-4
Connect E1_RX (N)-R to PE (Channel N)
5-6
Connect E1_TX (N+1)-R to PE (Channel N+1)
7-8
Connect E1_RX (N+1)-R to PE (Channel N+1)
9-10
11-12
13-14
15-16
Note:
If E1 line adopts 120 PCM cable balanced transmission mode, remove the short circuit
modules on X9~X16 on RDTB.
7-14
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)

RDTB occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 7-14.
Figure 7-14 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RDTB
7.7.7 Front Board

The front board of RDTB is DTB.
7.8 RGER Board

7.8.1 RGER Board Definition
The RGER is the resource shelf GE rear card of RNC.
7.8.2 Functions
RGER provides the following functions:
l
l
Providing one GE electric interface for GIPI

Providing one 232 debugging serial port and one debugging Ethernet interface
7.8.3 Panel
The structure of RGER panel is as shown in Figure 7-15.
7-15
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-15 RGER PANEL
7.8.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RGER panel are as shown in Table 7-8.
Table 7-8 INTERFACE ON RGER PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
GE1
Bi-directional
GE2
Bi-directional
DEBUG1-232
Bi-directional
DEBUG1-232
Bi-directional
Description
GE electric interface connects the external
system through the rear board, used.
Unused for ZXWR RNC
RGER
panel
Debugging Ethernet interface, connecting the

debugging machine (unused)
Debugging Ethernet interface, connecting the
debugging machine (unused)

RGER occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf. RGER can be inserted on the rear
slot of GIPI, as shown in Figure 7-16.
7-16
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-16 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGER
7.8.6 Front Board

The front board of RGER is GIPI.
7.9 RGIM1 Board

7.9.1 RGIM1 Board Definition
The RGIM1 is the universal rear board 1 of RNC.
7.9.2 Functions
RGIM1 provides the following functions:
l
l
Providing RS232 debugging serial port for APBE

Providing 8 K clock base interface
7.9.3 Panel
The structure of RGIM1 panel is as shown in Figure 7-17.
7-17
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-17 RGIM1 PANEL
7.9.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RGIM1 panel are as shown in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9 INTERFACE ON RGIM1 PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
On RGIM1,
DEBUG-232 and
8KOUT share one
physical interface.
RGIM1 panel
8KOUT/DEBUG-232
TX/Output
provides 1 8 K
base clock for 1
RJ485 interface on
CLKG/ICMG.
Connecting the
external PC as the
serial port

RGIM1 occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf (RGIM1 is used at Iu interface not at
Iub interface), as shown in Figure 7-18.
7-18
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-18 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGIM1
7.9.6 Front Board

The front board of RGIM1 is APBE/APBI.
7.10 RGUM1 Board

7.10.1 RGUM1 Board Definition
The RGUM1 is the Gigabit universal interface module rear card 1 of RNC.
7.10.2 Functions
RGUM1 provides the following functions:
l
l
l
Providing two control plane external cascading Ethernet ports for GUIM
Providing one debugging interface
Providing one clock input interface to connect CLKG/ICMG.
7.10.3 Panel
The structure of RGUM1 panel is as shown in Figure 7-19.
7-19
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-19 RGUM1 PANEL
7.10.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RGUM1 panel are as shown in Table 7-10.
Table 7-10 INTERFACE ON RGUM1 PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
Though the two rear boards on
the M/S slot, it provides one
FE1
Bi-directional
cascading network interface to

connect with THUB or UIMC on
the control shelf.
Through the two rear boards on
the M/S slot, the M/S slot provides
FE3
Bi-directional
one external network interface

respectively, serving as DEBUG
network interface.
RGUM1 panel
Through the two rear boards on

FE5
Bi-directional
the M/S slot, the M/S slot provides

one external network interface
respectively.
CLKIN
RX
Clock input interface, connecting

CLKG/ICMG/ICM.
Debugging Ethernet interface,
DEBUG-232
Bi-directional
connecting the debugging

machine (unused)
7-20
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)

RGUM1 occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGUM1
7.10.6 Front Board

The front board of RGUM1 is GUIM.
7.11 RGUM2 Board

7.11.1 RGUM2 Board Definition
The RGUM2 is the Gigabit universal interface module rear card 2 of RNC.
7.11.2 Functions
RGUM2 provides the following functions:
l
l
l
Providing two control plane external cascading Ethernet ports for GUIM
Providing one debugging interface
Providing one clock input interface to connect CLKG/ICMG
7.11.3 Panel
The structure of RGUM2 panel is as shown in Figure 7-21.
7-21
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-21 RGUM2 PANEL
7.11.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RGUM2 panel are as shown in Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 INTERFACE ON RGUM2 PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
Though the two rear
boards on the M/S
slot, it provides one
cascading network
FE2
Bi-directional
interface to connect
with THUB or UIMC
on the control shelf,
serving as DEBUG
network interface.
Through the two rear
RGUM2 panel
boards on the M/S

FE4
Bi-directional
slot, the M/S slot

provides one external
network interface
respectively.
Through the two rear
boards on the M/S
FE6
Bi-directional
slot, the M/S slot

provides one external
7-22
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
network interface
respectively.
Clock input
CLKIN
RX
interface, connecting
CLKG/ICMG/ICM
Debugging Ethernet
DEBUG-232
Bi-directional
the debugging
machine (unused)

RGUM2 occupies one slot on the resource shelf, as shown in Figure 7-22.
Figure 7-22 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGUM2
7.11.6 Front Board

The front board of RGUM2 is GUIM.
7.12 RMNIC Board

7.12.1 RMNIC Board Definition
The RMNIC is the MNIC rear board of RNC.
7.12.2 Functions
RMNIC provides the following functions:
l
l
Providing one Ethernet port for OMCB

Providing 232 debugging serial port for CPU
7.12.3 Panel
The structure of RMNIC panel is as shown in Figure 7-23.
7-23
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-23 RMNIC PANEL
7.12.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RMNIC are as shown in Table 7-12.
Table 7-12 INTERFACE ON RMNIC PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
FE1
Bi-directional
FE2
Bi-directional
Connecting with the

external OMCB.
FE electric interface
connects the external
through the rear board.
FE3
Bi-directional

RMNIC panel
FE4
Bi-directional

Debugging Ethernet
DEBUG-FE
Bi-directional
the debugging PC
(unused).
3 232 serial port,
PrPMC232
Bi-directional
connecting the external

PC (unused)
8KOUT/ARM232
TX/Bi-directional
Connecting the clock
7-24
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
board and providing 8 K
clock base/debugging
serial port for network
processor.

RMNIC occupies one slot on the 1 G resource shelf, as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RMNIC
7.12.6 Front Board

The front board of RMNIC is GIPI.
7.13 RMPB Board

7.13.1 RMPB Board Definition
The RMPB is the MPB rear board of RNC.
7.13.2 Functions
RMPB provides the external interface connection for ROMB, including:
l
l
l
Providing one Ethernet interface to connect OMC

Providing one semi-duplexing RS485 interface to connect PWRD
232 debugging network interface
7.13.3 Panel
The structure of RMPB panel is as shown in Figure 7-25.
7-25
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-25 RMPB PANEL
7.13.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RMPB panel are as shown in Table 7-13.
Table 7-13 INTERFACE ON RMPB PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
OMC1
Bi-directional
CPU_A external
Ethernet, unused.
1 100 M Ethernet
OMC2
Bi-directional
interface on the rear

board, connecting with
the external OMCR.
GPS485
Bi-directional
Connecting GPS
function modules.
Connected to RS485
RMPB panel
PD485
Bi-directional
(UP) interface on
PWRD.
Out-of-band
RS232
Bi-directional
management serial
port.
CPU_A debugging
DEBUG1-232
Bi-directional
serial port, connected

to the debugging
machine.
7-26
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
CPU_B debugging
DEBUG2-232
Bi-directional
serial port, connected

to the debugging
machine.

RMPB occupies one slot on the control shelf, as shown in Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-26 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RMPB
7.13.6 Front Board

The front board of RMPB is ROMB.
7.14 RSVB Board

7.14.1 RSVB Board Definition
The RSVB is the rear board of RNC's server board.
7.14.2 Functions
RSVB performs the following functions:
Providing at most 2GE + 4FE electric interface for SBCX, one of which multiplex one
physical port with one 232 debugging serial port.
7.14.3 Panel
The structure of RSVB panel is as shown in Figure 7-27.
7-27
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 7-27 RSVB PANEL
7.14.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RSVB panel are as shown in Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 INTERFACE ON RSVB PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
1 G Ethernet interface,
connecting the OMC1
OMC1
Bi-directional
on the slave board

to implement the M/S
backup of SBCX.
1 G Ethernet interface,
OMC2
Bi-directional
connecting the FE1 on

RMNIC to provide the
OMCB access path.
RSVB panel
100 M Ethernet interface,

OMP1
Bi-directional
connecting to OMC2 on
ROMP to provide LMT
access.
HEART1
Bi-directional
100 M Ethernet interface
HEART2
Bi-directional
100 M Ethernet interface

100 M Ethernet
RS232
Bi-directional
interface/RS232
interface, connecting the
7-28
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
external switch through
the cable.
USB 2.0 interface,
USB1
Bi-directional
connected to USB
external equipment.
USB 2.0 interface,
USB2
Bi-directional
connected to USB
external equipment.

RSVB occupies one slot (odd slot) corresponding to SBCX on the control shelf and the
switching shelf, as shown in Figure 7-28.
Figure 7-28 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RSVB
7.14.6 Front Board

The front board of RSVB is SBCX.
7.15 RUIM2 Board

7.15.1 RUIM2 Board Definition
The RUIM2 is the UIM rear board 2 of RNC.
7.15.2 Functions
RUIM2 performs the following functions:
l
l
l
l
Providing five Ethernet ports for UIMU

7-29
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
7.15.3 Panel
The structure of RUIM2 panel is as shown in Figure 7-29.
Figure 7-29 RUIM2 PANEL
7.15.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RUIM2 panel are as shown in Table 7-15.
Table 7-15 INTERFACE ON RUIM2 PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
FE1
Bi-directional
Providing ten cascading
FE3
Bi-directional
FE5
Bi-directional
FE7
Bi-directional
network interfaces
through the two rear
board on M/S slot.
CHUB can be omitted
in the case of small
capacity, to gather the
control plane data from
FE9
Bi-directional
RUIM2 panel
other resource shelves.

C1-4, U19-24 Ten 100
M Ethernet interfaces
CLKIN
board, to transmit 8
RX
K/16 M/PP2S clock

signals
CPU debugging
DEBUG-FE
Bi-directional
network interface,
7-30
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
connecting the
debugging PC
CPU debugging
DEBUG-232
Bi-directional
network interface,
connecting the
debugging PC
Note:
FE1 and FE2 are used for CHUB connection. FE5, FE7, and FE9 are for TRUNK
connection. FE7 is obliged to be configured for adjacent connection.

RUIM2 occupies one slot (odd slot) on the control shelf and the switching shelf, as shown
in Figure 7-30.
Figure 7-30 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RUIM2
7.15.6 Front Board

The front board of RUIM2 is UIMC.
7.16 RUIM3 Board

7.16.1 RUIM3 Board Definition
The RUIM3 is the UIM rear board 3 of RNC.
7.16.2 Functions
RUIM3 performs the following functions:
7-31
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
l
l
l
l
Providing five Ethernet ports for UIMU

Providing one debugging Ethernet interface.
7.16.3 Panel
The structure of RUIM3 panel is as shown in Figure 7-31.
Figure 7-31 RUIM3 PANEL
7.16.4 Interfaces
The interfaces on RUIM3 panel are as shown in Table 7-16.
Table 7-16 INTERFACE ON RUIM3 PANEL
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
FE2
Bi-directional
Providing ten
FE4
Bi-directional
FE6
Bi-directional
FE8
Bi-directional
cascading network
interfaces through
the two rear board
on M/S slot.
CHUB can be
RUIM3 panel
omitted in the case

FE10
Bi-directional
of small capacity,
to gather the control
plane data from other
resource shelves.
7-32
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Location
Interface
Direction
Description
C14, U1924, Ten
100 M Ethernet
interfaces
CLKIN
board, to transmit 8
RX
K/16 M/PP2S clock

signals
CPU debugging
DEBUG-FE
Bi-directional
network interface,
connecting the
debugging PC
CPU debugging
DEBUG-232
Bi-directional
network interface,
connecting the
debugging PC
Note:
FE2 and FE4 are used for CHUB connection. FE6, FE8, and FE10 are for TRUNK
connection. FE8 is obliged to be configured for adjacent connection.

RUIM3 occupies one slot (even slot) on the control shelf and the switching shelf, as shown
in Figure 7-32.
Figure 7-32 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RUIM3
7.16.6 Front Board

The front board of RUIM3 is UIMC.
7-33
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
7-34
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 8
Backplane
Table of Contents
Definition ....................................................................................................................8-1
Function .....................................................................................................................8-1
Structure ....................................................................................................................8-1
Relation of Shelf and Backplane.................................................................................8-2
BCTC Board...............................................................................................................8-2
BGSN Board ..............................................................................................................8-4
BPSN .........................................................................................................................8-7
RBID Board................................................................................................................8-9
8.1 Definition
The backplane is very important in the shelf, consists of the service subracks with different
backplanes.
8.2 Function
The front board and the rear board are inserted on the backplane. The boards on the
same shelf are connected through the printing printed circuit cable on the backplane, thus
greatly reducing the cables on the back of the backplane and increasing the reliability of
the whole equipment.
8.3 Structure
The structure of the backplane is as shown in Figure 8-1.
8-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 8-1 STRUCTURE OF BACKPLANE
1. Fixation screw
2. Connector
3. Positioning hole
4. Connector
8.4 Relation of Shelf and Backplane

The relationship between shelf and backplane is as shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 RELATION OF SHELF AND BACKPLANE
S.N.
Shelf
Backplane
Switching shelf
BPSN
Control shelf
BCTC
1 G resource shelf
BGSN
1 G interface shelf
BGSN
8.5 BCTC Board

8.5.1 Definition
BCTC is one of the backplane of ZXWR RNC.
8.5.2 Functions
BCTC performs the following functions:
1. Control Ethernet: The backplane provides 46 100 M + 1 1000 M control stream
Ethernet access, thereinto,
l GE port (1 1000 M): To interconnect UIMC and CHUB on the local shelf
8-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 8 Backplane
Outward control Ethernet gathering: CHUB provides forty-six Ethernet interfaces

for all resource shelves and level-1 switching shelf, for the system control stream
Ethernet gathering
2. Clock reception, extraction and distribution
a. Extracting 8 K clock base from DTB and sends to CLKG/ICMG through the cable
b. Sending the clock to UIMC through the backplane and distribute the system clock
to all service slots on the shelf through the backplane
c.
Providing fifteen sets of the system clock to CLG/ICMG and sends to all resource
subsystems through the cable
3. Power supply and ground

Providing -48 V socket and -48 VGND/GND/GNDP ground
8.5.3 Structure
The structure of BCTC is as shown in Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-2 STRUCTURE OF BCTC
8.5.4 Power Supply Interface

The power interfaces on BCTC are as shown in Table 8-2.
8-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 8-2 POWER INTERFACE ON BCTC

Interface
Purpose
Connection
X0 and X1 connect -48 V/-48
X0, X1
GND/PE signal grounding
Power socket
poles of the rack busbar

correspondingly.
8.5.5 Jumpers and Switches

The jumper switches, X4, X5 and X6, on BCTC are used to configure the office, rack,
and shelf information where the shelf locates. 0 indicates that the jumper cap is on and 1
indicates that the jumper cap is removed, as shown in Table 8-3, Table 8-4 and Table 8-5.
Table 8-3 BGSN OFFICE ID JUMPER SWITCH (X4)
Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
TRIB_ID0
TRIB_ID1
TRIB_ID2
Unused
Table 8-4 BGSN RACK ID JUMPER SWITCH (X5)

Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
RackID0
RackID1
RackID2
RackID3
Table 8-5 BGSN SHELF ID JUMPER SWITCH (X6)

Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
ShelfID0
ShelfID1
Unused
Unused

BCTC can be configured on any layer.
8.5.7 Shelf Type

The shelf that corresponds to BCTC is the control shelf.
8.6 BGSN Board

8.6.1 Definition
BGSN is one of the backplane of ZXWR RNC.
8-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 8 Backplane
8.6.2 Functions
BGSN performs the following functions:
1. Control Ethernet
The backplane provides 24 100 M control stream Ethernet access.
2. User plane Ethernet
The backplane provides 24 100 M and 21 1000 M user plane Ethernet access.
3. TDM bus
The backplane provides 32 K TS slot bus.
4. Clock reception and distribution
CLKG/ICMG sends the clock to GUIM through the cable and sends to all service slots
on the 1 G resource shelf through the backplane.
Providing -48 V socket and -48 VGND/GND/GNDP ground.
8.6.3 Structure
The structure of BGSN panel is as shown in Figure 8-3.
Figure 8-3 STRUCTURE OF BGSN
8.6.4 Power Interface

The power interfaces on BGSN are as shown in Table 8-6.
8-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 8-6 POWER INTERFACE ON BGSN

Interface
Purpose
Connection
X1, X2, and X3 connect -48
X1, X2, X3
V/-48 GND/PE signal grounding
Power socket

correspondingly.
8.6.5 Jumpers Switches

The jumper switches, X4, X5, and X6, on BGSN are used to configure the office, rack,
indicates that the jumper cap is removed, as shown in Table 8-7, Table 8-8, and Table 8-9.
Table 8-7 BGSN OFFICE ID JUMPER SWITCH (X4)
Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
TRIB_ID0
TRIB_ID1
TRIB_ID2
Unused
Table 8-8 BGSN RACK ID JUMPER SWITCH (X5)

Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
RackID0
RackID1
RackID2
RackID3
Table 8-9 BGSN SHELF ID JUMPER SWITCH (X6)

Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
ShelfID0
ShelfID1
Unused
Unused

BGSN can be configured on any layer.
8.6.7 Corresponding Shelf Type

The shelf that corresponds to BGSN is:
l
l
Resource shelf
Interface shelf
8-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 8 Backplane
8.7 BPSN
8.7.1 Definition
BPSN is one of the backplane of ZXWR RNC.
8.7.2 Functions
BPSN performs the following functions:
1. Control Ethernet
The backplane provides 24 100 M control stream Ethernet access.
2. Clock reception and distribution
a. The backplane receives the clock from CLKG/ICMG
b. The backplane distributes the system clock to all service slots through UIMC main
control board
Providing -48 V socket and -48 VGND/GND/GNDP ground
8.7.3 Structure
The structure of BPSN is as shown in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 STRUCTURE OF BPSN
8.7.4 Power Supply Interface

The power interfaces on BPSN are as shown in Table 8-10.
8-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 8-10 POWER INTERFACE ON BPSN

Interface
Purpose
Connection
X1, X2, and X3 connect -48
V/-48 GND/PE signal grounding
X1, X2, X3
Power socket

correspondingly through the
subrack power secondary filter.
8.7.5 Jumpers Switches

The jumper switches, X4, X5, and X6, on BPSN are used to configure the office, rack,
indicates that the jumper cap is removed, as shown in Table 8-11, Table 8-12. and Table
8-13
Table 8-11 BPSN OFFICE ID JUMPER SWITCH (X4)
Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
TRIB_ID0
TRIB_ID1
TRIB_ID2
Unused
Table 8-12 BPSN RACK ID JUMPER SWITCH (X5)

Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
RackID0
RackID1
RackID2
RackID3
Table 8-13 BPSN SHELF ID JUMPER SWITCH (X6)

Digit 1 (Lowest)
Digit 2
Digit 3 (Highest)
Digit 4
ShelfID0
ShelfID1
Unused
Unused

BPSN can be configured on any layer.
8.7.7 Corresponding Shelf Type

The shelf that corresponds to BPSN is the switching shelf.
8-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 8 Backplane
8.8 RBID Board

8.8.1 Definition
The RBID is the rear board of ZXWR RNC backplane DIP switch, inserted on the back of
the functional subrack.
8.8.2 Functions
RBID provides such information as TRIB ID, RACK ID, and SHELF ID for the backplane.
8.8.3 Structure
The structure of RBID is as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 STRUCTURE OF RBID
8.8.4 Jumpers and Switches

The jumper layout on RBID is as shown in Figure 8-6.
8-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 8-6 JUMPER LAYOUT OF RBID
Table 8-14 DIP SWITCHES ON RBID BACKPLANE

DIP Switch
Purpose
Example
To configure the office
the jumper cap is removed.
ON indicates the jumper cap is on. OFF indicates

X2
information where the shelf

locates.
X2 are all ON: The value is the binary system 0000.

X3 are all ON: The value is the binary system 0000.
X3
X4
To configure the rack information
The lower two values of X4 are ON and the upper
where the shelf locates.
two are OFF: The value is the binary system 0011.

X2, X3, and X4 are 0, 0, 3. Since the actual rack ID
To configure the shelf
and shelf ID should plus 1, the value indicates that
information.
the shelf is located in Office 0, Rack 1, and Shelf 4.
8.8.5 Configuration Method

In ZXWR RNC, the shelf ID can be set through the jumper device on the backplane or
through RBID. The details methods are as below:
1. Insert RBID above Slot 17 on the back of the functional subrack.
8-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 8 Backplane
Unplug RBID when opertaing on it.

2. Remove all jumper caps on the backplane.
3. Switch the DIP switches on the backplane.
Note:
Do remove the jumper caps from the jumper device on the backplane when operating on
RBID, when the configurations of the jumper device on the backplane are invalid.
8-11
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
8-12
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9
Cables
Table of Contents
RNC Cable Introduction .............................................................................................9-1
Power Cables.............................................................................................................9-1
Cabinet Grounding Cable ..........................................................................................9-6
Clock Cables ..............................................................................................................9-6
Ethernet Cables .......................................................................................................9-12
E1/T1 Cables ...........................................................................................................9-16
Monitor Cables .........................................................................................................9-23
Single Mode Fiber Optics ........................................................................................9-29
9.1 RNC Cable Introduction

ZXWR RNCThe following cables are used:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
cabinet power cable

cabinet GND cable
clock cable
Ethernet cable
E1/T1 cable
E3/T3 cable
monitor cable
Single mode fiber optics
9.2 Power Cables

9.2.1 The Classification of the Cabinet Power Cable
The RNC cabinet power cables include two types:
l
The external power cable

The external power cable provides power to the RNC equipments.
The internal power cable

The internal power cable provides power to the internal modules in the RNC
equipments. It includes the following sub-types:
Fan Shelf Power Cable
Fan Subrack Power Cable

9-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
The external power cable for the service subrack
The Internal Power Cable for the Service Subrack
9.2.2 External Power Cable

Function
Provide power to the RNC cabinet.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the external power cable is shown in Figure 9-1.
Figure 9-1 External Power Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The signal explanation of the external power cable is shown in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 External Power Cable Signal Explanation
Signal Name
Color
-48V
Blue
-48V GND
Black
Wiring Diagram
Connects the external DC power cabinet to the top filter of the RNC cabinet.
9-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
9.2.3 Internal Power Cables

9.2.3.1 Fan Shelf Power Cable
Function
The fan shelf power cable introduces the -48 V power from the busbar to the fan monitor
board where it is filtered and supplied to the fan unit of the layer.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the power cable in the fan shelf is shown in Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Physical Appearance of Fan Shelf Power Cable
Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram of the power cable in the fan shelf is shown in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Fan Shelf Power Cable Wiring Diagram
Terminal
Connector Location
terminal A
Fan Socket
B1 Terminal (Blue)
Busbar -48 V
B2 Terminal (Yellow Green)
Busbar PE
B3 Terminal (Black)
Busbar -48 VGND
9.2.3.2 Fan Subrack Power Cable

Function
The fan subrack power cable introduces the -48 V power from the busbar to the fan subrack
monitor board where it is filtered and supplied to the fan unit of the layer.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the power cable in the fan subrack is shown in Figure 9-3.
9-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 9-3 Physical Appearance of Fan Subrack Power Cable
Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram of the power cable in the fan subrack is shown in Table 9-3.
Table 9-3 Fan Subrack Power Cable Wiring Diagram
Terminal
Connector Location
terminal A
Fan Socket
B1 Terminal (Blue)
Busbar -48 V
Busbar PE
B3 Terminal (Black)
Busbar -48 VGND
9.2.3.3 External Power Cable of Service Subrack

Function
The external power cable of service subrack connects the busbar to the power filter of the
cabinet.
Physical Appearance
The physical features of the power cable are shown in Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Service subrack external power cable Physical Appearance
Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram of the power cable is shown in Table 9-4.
9-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Table 9-4 Wiring Diagram of the Power Cable

Terminal
Connector Location
terminal A
Subrack power filter
Busbar PE
B2 Terminal (Blue)
Busbar -48 V
B3 Terminal (Black)
Busbar -48 VGND
9.2.3.4 Internal Power Cable of Service Subrack

Function
The internal power cable in the service subrack connects the subrack power filter to the
back plane.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the internal power cable in the service subrack is shown in Figure
9-5.
Figure 9-5 The Physical Appearance of Internal Power Cable for Service Subrack
Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram of the internal power cable in the service subrack is shown in Table
9-5.
Table 9-5 Wiring Diagram of Internal Power Cable
Terminal
Connector Location
A1 Terminal
Subrack Power Filter
A2 Terminal
Subrack Power Filter
B1 Terminal (Blue)
Back Plane Power Connector -48 V
Back Plane Power Connector GNDP
B3 Terminal (Black)
Back Plane Power Connector -48 VGND
9-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
9.3 Cabinet Grounding Cable

Function
The cabinet grounding cable connects the equipments to the grounding net to protect the
equipment and the personnel.
Physical Appearance
The physical appearance of the cabinet grounding cable is shown in Figure 9-6.
Figure 9-6 Cabinet Grounding Cable Physical Appearance
Wiring Diagram
The cabinet grounding cable has no direction and could be connected to the grounding
busbar in the machine room.
9.4 Clock Cables

9.4.1 Clock Cable Classification
The RNC clock cable includes the following types:
l
l
l
Line Clock Cable

BITS Clock Cable
System Clock Distribution Cable
9.4.2 Line Clock Cable

Function
Provides line clock input to the CLKG/ICMG/ICM board..
9-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the line clock cable is shown in Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Line Clock Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the line clock cable is shown in Table 9-6.
Table 9-6 Line Clock Cable Conductors Relation
terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
White
Blue
White
Orange
Terminal A Metal Shell
Aluminum Shield
Terminal B Metal Shell
Connection Relation
Terminal A is connected to the "8KOUT/DEBUG-232" printing on the rear board RGIM1 or
RDTB. Terminal B is connected to the "8KIN1" printing or the "8KIN2" printing on the rear
board RCKG1 and RCKG2.
9.4.3 BITS Clock Cable

Function
Provides external BITS clock input to the CLKG/ICMG/ICM board..
Physical Appearance
The BITS clock cable is available in two models, one is 2*4 pin 120PCM cable whose
physical feature is shown in Figure 9-8.
9-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 9-8 BITS Clock Cable Physical Appearance (120)
Another model is 4*1 pin 75 micro-coaxial cable whose physical feature is shown in
Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9 BITS Clock Cable Physical Appearance (75)
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the 2*4 core 120PCM cable is shown in Table 9-7.
Table 9-7 BITS Clock Cable (120) Conductors Relation
terminal A
Cable Color Code
Terminal B
Signal Definition
A1 Terminal
Red
2MB1+
White
2MB1
Red
2MB2+
White
2MB2
Red
2MH1+
White
2MH1
Red
2MH2+
White
2MH2
GND
A2 Terminal
A3 Terminal
A4 Terminal
The conductors relation of the 4*1 core 75PCM cable is shown in Table 9-8.
9-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Table 9-8 BITS Clock Cable (75) Cable Conductors Relation

terminal A
Coaxial Cable
Terminal B
Signal Definition
A1 Terminal
Coaxial Cable
2MB1
Conductor
A2 Terminal
Shielded Cable
Coaxial Cable
2MB2
Conductor
A3 Terminal
Shielded Cable
Coaxial Cable
2MH1
Conductor
A4 Terminal
Shielded Cable
Coaxial Cable
2MH2
Conductor
Shielded Cable
Wiring Diagram
Terminal A goes to the office BITS clock source. Terminal B goes to the "2MBps/2MHz"
printing on the rear board RCKG1 and RCKG2.
9.4.4 System Clock Distribution Cable

Function
The system clock distribution cable sends the system clock from the CLKG/ICMG/ICM
board to every shelf.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of system clock distribution cable is shown in Figure 9-10.
9-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 9-10 System Clock Distribution Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductor's relation of the system clock distribution cable is shown in Table 9-9.
Table 9-9 The Conductors Relation of System Clock Distribution Cable
Terminal A Cable
Color Code
Terminal B
Terminal A Cable
Conductor
Conductor
White
Blue
16
White
17
Orange
5
B1 Terminal
31
White
32
Green
White
20
Brown
White
Blue
18
White
19
Orange
5
B2 Terminal
33
White
34
Green
White
20
Brown
6
9-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Terminal A Cable
Color Code
Terminal B
Terminal A Cable
Conductor
Conductor
White
Blue
21
White
22
Orange
5
B3 Terminal
36
White
37
Green
10
White
25
Brown
White
Blue
23
White
24
Orange
5
B4 Terminal
38
White
39
Green
10
White
25
Brown
11
White
12
Blue
26
White
27
Orange
5
B5 Terminal
41
White
42
Green
15
White
30
Brown
13
White
14
Blue
28
White
29
Orange
5
B6 Terminal
43
White
44
Green
15
White
30
Brown
9-11
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Wiring Diagram
erminal A is connected to the "CLKGOUT" printing on the rear board RGIM1/2. Terminal
B is connected to the "CLKGIN" printing on the rear board RUIM2/3.
9.5 Ethernet Cables

9.5.1 Ethernet cable classification
RNC Ethernet cable includes the following types:
l
l
THUB cable
Shielded straight through cable
9.5.2 THUB Cable

Function
The THUB board is connected to the local shelf UIMC through a THUB cable.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of THUB cable is shown in Figure 9-11.
Figure 9-11 THUB Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of THUB cable is shown in Table 9-10.
9-12
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Table 9-10 THUB Cable Conductors Relation

Terminal A Cable
Color Code
Terminal B
Terminal A Cable
Conductor
Conductor
33
White/Orange
34
Orange
35
White/Green
36
Green
6
B1 Terminal
31
Blue
32
White/Blue
21
White/Brown
37
Brown
16
White/Orange
17
Orange
18
White/Green
19
Green
6
B2 Terminal
Blue
31
White/Blue
32
White/Brown
20
Brown
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
Green
6
B3 Terminal
Blue
White/Blue
20
White/Brown
21
Brown
22
White/Orange
23
Orange
38
White/Green
24
Green
21
Blue
25
White/Blue
37
White/Brown
B4 Terminal
9-13
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Terminal A Cable
Color Code
Terminal B
Terminal A Cable
Conductor
Conductor
39
Brown
White/Orange
Orange
White/Green
10
Green
6
B5 Terminal
Blue
11
White/Blue
20
White/Brown
25
Brown
40
White/Orange
41
Orange
42
White/Green
43
Green
6
B6 Terminal
30
Blue
37
White/Blue
39
White/Brown
44
Brown
26
White/Orange
27
Orange
28
White/Green
29
Green
6
B7 Terminal
11
Blue
30
White/Blue
44
White/Brown
39
Brown
12
White/Orange
13
Orange
14
White/Green
15
Green
11
Blue
25
White/Blue
30
White/Brown
B8 Terminal
9-14
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Terminal A Cable
Color Code
Terminal B
Terminal A Cable
Conductor
44
Conductor
Brown
Wiring Diagram
The terminal A is connected to the rear board RCHB1/2 panel at the ports of "FE1-8",
"FE9-16", "FE17- 24", "FE25-32", "FE33-40" and "FE41-46". The terminal B is connected
to the rear board RUIM2/RUIM3 at the ports of "FEn"(n=1~6).
9.5.3 Shielded Straigt-Through Cable

Function
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Serves for the O&M center of Node B.

Serves for the O&M center of RNC.
The LMT cable
The monitor cable for the power distribution subrack
The monitor cable for the fan subrack
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the shielded straight-through cable is shown in Figure 9-12.
Figure 9-12 Physical Appearance of Shielded Straight-through Cable
Signal Explanation
The cable conductor's relation of the shielded straight-through cable is shown in Table
9-11.
Table 9-11 Cable Conductor's Relation
Terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
White Orange
Orange
White Green
Green
9-15
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
Blue
White Blue
White Brown
Brown
Wiring Diagram
The wiring diagram of the shielded straight-through cable is shown in Table 9-12.
Table 9-12 The Wiring Diagram of the Shielded Straigt-Through Cable
Function
Terminal A
Terminal B
Serves for the O&M center of
The "FE1" printing on the
The "OMC2" printing on th erear
Node B.
RMNIC panel of the rear board
board RSVB
The cable for the O&M center of
The "OMC1" printing on the
Connects Hub to the NetNumen
Node B.
RSVB panel of the rear board
server
LMT cable
The "OMP1" printing on the
Connects Hub to the local
RSVB panel of the rear board
server
The monitor cable of the power
The "PD485" printing on the
The "RS485" printing on the
distribution subrack
RMPB panel of the rear board
power shelf interface board

PEMB.
Fan subrack monitor cable
The "RS485" print on the rear
FANBO X1: to the top fan unit
panel of the fan subrack
FANBO X2: to the 1st layer fan

subrack
FANBO X3: to the 2nd layer fan
subrack
FANBO X4: to the 3rd layer
subrack
9.6 E1/T1 Cables

9.6.1 E1/T1 cable classification
RNC E1/T1 cable includes the following types:
l
l
l
l
External
External
External
External
E1 cable (75)
E1 cable (120)
T1 cable (100 unshielded)
T1 cable (100 shielded)
9-16
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
9.6.2 External E1 Cable (75)

Purpose
Connect the external E1 transmission equipments.
Appearance
The physical appearance of external E1 cable (75) is as shown in Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13 Physical Appearance of External E1 Cable (75)
Signal Description
The pin d of external E1 cable (75) is as shown in Table 9-13.
Table 9-13 Pin Definition of External E1 Cable (75)
End A
Color
End B
(2, 4)
(Conductor # 1, shielded cable)
(6, 8)
(10, 12)
(14, 16)
(15, 13)
(Conductor # 5 , shielded cable)
(11, 9)
(7, 5)
(3, 1)
(Conductor # 8 , shielded cable)
(35, 37)
(39, 41)
(Conductor # 10, shielded
End B1
cable)
(43, 45)

cable)
(47, 49)

cable)
(36, 38)
(Conductor # 13 , shielded
cable)
9-17
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
End A
Color
End B
(40, 42)

cable)
(44, 46)

cable)
(48, 50)

cable)
(18, 20)
(22, 24)
(26, 28)
(30, 32)
(31, 29)
(27, 25)
(23, 21)
(19, 17)
(51, 53)
(55, 57)

cable)
(59, 61)
END B2

cable)
(63, 65)

cable)
(52, 54)

cable)
(56, 58)

cable)
(60, 62)

cable)
(64, 66)

cable)
Description of Connection
End A is connected to the ports printed "T1/E1 1-16" and "T1/E1 17-32" on back board
RDTA/RDTB. End B is connected to the external equipments and the connector is
made per the site specification. The connectors with odd ID is for transmission and the
connectors with even ID is for receiving.
9-18
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
9.6.3 External E1 Cable (120)

Purpose
Connect the external E1 transmission equipments.
Appearance
The physical appearance of external E1 cable (120) is as shown in Figure 9-14.
Figure 9-14 Physical Appearance of External E1 Cable (120)
Signal Description
The pin definition of external E1 cable (120) is as shown in Table 9-14.
Table 9-14 Pin Definition of External E1 Cable (120)
End A
Color
End B
(2, 4)
Blue Red 1 Blue Black 1
(6, 8)
Pink Red 1 Pink Black 1
(10, 12)
Green Red 1 Green Black 1
(14, 16)
Orange red 1 Orange black 1
(15, 13)
Gray Red 1 Gray Black 1
(11, 9)
(7, 5)
(3, 1)
(35, 37)
(39, 41)
(43, 45)
(47, 49)
(36, 38)
(40, 42)
(44, 46)
(48, 50)
End B1
9-19
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
End A
Color
End B
(18, 20)
(22, 24)
(26, 28)
(30, 32)
(31, 29)
(27, 25)
(23, 21)
(19, 17)
(51, 53)
(55, 57)
(59, 61)
(63, 65)
(52, 54)
(56, 58)
(60, 62)
(64, 66)
End B2
Description of Connection
End A is connected to the ports printed "T1/E1 1-16" and "T1/E1 17-32" on back board
RDTA/RDTB. End B is connected to the external equipments and the connector is
made per the site specification. The connectors with odd ID is for transmission and the
connectors with even ID is for receiving.
9.6.4 External T1 Cable (100 Unshielded)

Function
Connects the system external T1 transmission equipments.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the external T1 cable (100 unshielded) is shown in Figure 9-15.
9-20
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Figure 9-15 External T1 Cable (100 unshielded) Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the external T1 cable (100 unshielded) is shown in Table 9-15.
Table 9-15 External T1 Cable (100 Unshielded) Conductors Relation
terminal A
Color Code
(34, 33)
(White, Blue)
(36, 35)
(White, Orange)
(31, 32)
(White, Green)
(17, 18)
(White, Brown)
(2, 3)
(White, Blue)
(16, 1)
(White, Orange)
(6, 7)
(White, Green)
(21, 22)
(White, Brown)
(4, 5)
(White, Blue)
(19, 20)
(White, Orange)
(10, 11)
(White, Green)
(25, 26)
(White, Brown)
(23, 24)
(White, Blue)
(8, 9)
(White, Orange)
(27, 28)
(White, Green)
(12, 13)
(White, Brown)
(42, 41)
(White, Blue)
(43, 44)
(White, Orange)
(29, 30)
(White, Green)
(14, 15)
(White, Brown)
(38, 37)
(White, Blue)
(40, 39)
(White, Orange)
Terminal B
Red Ribbon
Yellow Ribbon
Blue Ribbon
Purple Ribbon
White Ribbon
Black Ribbon
9-21
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Wiring Explanation
The terminal A goes to the "T1/E1 1-16", "T1/E1 17-32" printings at the rear board
RDTA/RDTB. Terminal B goes to the system external equipment and the connectors
made at site. The odd number end is transmitting and the even number end is receiving.
9.6.5 External T1 Cable (100 Shielded)

Function
Connects the system external T1 transmission equipments.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the external T1 cable (100 Shielded) is shown in Figure 9-16.
Figure 9-16 External T1 cable (100 shielded) Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the external T1 cable (100 shielded) is shown in Table 9-16.
Table 9-16 External T1 cable (100 shielded) Conductors Relation
terminal A
Color Code
(34, 33)
(White Blue, Blue)
(36, 35)
(White Orange, Orange)
(31, 32)
(White Green, Green)
(17, 18)
(White Brown, Brown)
(2, 3)
(White Blue, Blue)
(16, 1)
(6, 7)
(21, 22)
(4, 5)
(White Blue, Blue)
(19, 20)
(10, 11)
(25, 26)
Terminal B
B1 Terminal
B2 Terminal
B3 Terminal
9-22
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
terminal A
Color Code
(23, 24)
(White Blue, Blue)
(8, 9)
(27, 28)
(12, 13)
(42, 41)
(White Blue, Blue)
(43, 44)
(29, 30)
(14, 15)
(38, 37)
(White Blue, Blue)
(40, 39)
Terminal B
B4 Terminal
B5 Terminal
B6 Terminal
Wiring Explanation
The terminal A goes to the "T1/E1 1-16", "T1/E1 17-32" printings at the rear board
RDTA/RDTB. Terminal B goes to the system external equipment and the connectors
made at site. The odd number end is transmitting and the even number end is receiving.
9.7 Monitor Cables

9.7.1 Monitor Cable Classification
The RNC monitor cable includes the following types:
l
l
l
l
l
l
Environment Monitor Adaptor Cable

Rack Front/Rear Door Access Control Cable
Machine Room Access Control Sensor Cable
IR Sensor Cable
smoke sensor cable
H/T sensor cable
9.7.2 Environment Monitor Adaptor Cable

Function
Connects the power subrack and all the access control and sensor cables.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the environment monitor adaptor cable is shown in Figure 9-17.
9-23
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 9-17 Environment Monitor Adaptor Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the environment monitor adaptor cable is shown in Table 9-17.
Table 9-17 Environment Monitor Adaptor Cable Conductors Relation
Signal
terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
XMJ3
White
GND
15
Blue
XMJ4
White
GND
16
Orange
XMJ5
White
GND
17
Green
XMJ6
White
GND
18
Brown
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Plug Conductor
IRDA
White
GND
19
Blue
V12S
White
GND
20
Orange
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Plug Conductor
TEMP
White
GND
21
Blue
HUM
White
V5S
22
Orange
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Plug Conductor
B1 Terminal
B2 Terminal
B3 Terminal
9-24
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Signal
terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
V12S
10
White
SMOKE
23
Blue
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Plug Conductor
V12S
11
White
V5S
24
Blue
RSVIN
12
White
GND
25
Orange
RSOUT
13
White (Green)
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Plug Conductor
B4 Terminal
B5 Terminal
Wiring Diagram
The A end goes to the rear panel printing "SENSORS" on the power subrack. The B1 end
goes to the front/rear door access control cable of the rack and the machine room access
control sensor cable. The B2 end goes to the IR sensor cable. The B3 end goes to the
H/T sensor cable. The B4 end goes to the smoke sensor cable. The B5 end is reserved
for future use.
9.7.3 Rack Front/Rear Door Access Control Cable

Function
Connects rack front/rear door access control sensor to the monitor cable.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the rack front/rear door access control cable is shown in Figure
9-18.
Figure 9-18 Rack Front/Rear Access Control Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the rack front/rear door access control cable is shown below.
9-25
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 9-18 Rack Front/Rear Door Access Control Cable Conductors Relation
Signal
terminal A
Color Code
MJ1
White
GND
Blue
MJ2
White
GND
Blue
Terminal B
B1 Terminal
B2 Terminal
Wiring Diagram
The terminal A is connected to the monitor cable. The terminal B is connected to the
magnetic switch of the rack front/rear door.
9.7.4 Machine Room Access Control Sensor Cable

Function
Connects machine room access control sensor to the monitor cable.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the machine room access control sensor cable is shown in Figure
9-19.
Figure 9-19 Machine Room Access Control Sensor Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the machine room access control sensor cable is shown in Table
9-19.
Table 9-19 Machine Room Access Control Sensor Cable Conductors Relation
Signal
terminal A
Color Code
MJ3
White
GND
Blue
MJ4
White
GND
Blue
MJ5
White
GND
Blue
Terminal B
B1 Terminal
B2 Terminal
B3 Terminal
9-26
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Signal
terminal A
Color Code
MJ6
White
GND
Blue
Terminal B
B4 Terminal
Wiring Diagram
The terminal A is connected to the monitor cable. The terminal B is connected to the
magnetic switch of the machine room.
9.7.5 IR Sensor Cable

Function
Connects IR sensor to the monitor cable.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of IR sensor cable is shown in Figure 9-20.
Figure 9-20 IR Sensor Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of IR sensor cable is shown in Table 9-20.
Table 9-20 IR Sensor Cable Conductors Relation
terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
White
Blue
White
12V+
Orange
12V-
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Wiring Diagram
The terminal A is connected to the monitor cable.
9-27
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
9.7.6 Smoke Sensor Cable

Function
Connects the smoke sensor with the monitor cable.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the smoke sensor cable is shown in Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-21 Smoke Sensor Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
smoke sensor cable conductors relation is shown in Table 9-21.
Table 9-21 smoke sensor cable conductors relation
Terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
White
Blue
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Wiring Diagram
The terminal A is connected to the monitor cable.
9.7.7 H/T Sensor Cable

Function
Connects H/T sensor to the monitor cable.
Physical Appearance
The physical feature of the H/T sensor cable is shown in Figure 9-22.
9-28
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 9 Cables
Figure 9-22 H/T Sensor Cable Physical Appearance
Signal Explanation
The conductors relation of the H/T sensor cable is shown in Table 9-22.
Table 9-22 H/T Sensor Cable Conductor'S Relation
terminal A
Color Code
Terminal B
Gray
Orange
Green
Brown
Plug Conductor
Shielded Cable
Plug Conductor
Wiring Diagram
The terminal A is connected to the monitor cable. The terminal B is connected to the H/T
sensor.
9.8 Single Mode Fiber Optics

Function
Connects the interface board with the external optical transmission equipment
Physical Appearance
The both ends of a single mode fiber optics are both LC/PC terminal.
Wiring Diagram
The one end of a single mode fiber optics goes to the interface board optical interface, the
other end goes to the external NE.
9-29
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
9-30
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 10
Other Devices and

Accessories
Table of Contents
GPS Active Antenna and Lightening Arrester ...........................................................10-1
Alarm Box ................................................................................................................10-3
10.1 GPS Active Antenna and Lightening Arrester

10.1.1 Model
1. The model of GPS active antenna is MBGPS-38, as shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 APPEARANCE OF GPS ACTIVE ANTENNA
1. GPS antenna
2.
Installation clip
components
3. Installation pipe
4. Feeder
5. Pole
6. Pole components
7. Cabling band
2. The lightening arrester is in grey and is made of die casting aluminum. The appearance
of the model CSP-III-006 is as shown in Figure 10-2.
10-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 10-2 APPEARANCE OF GPS ANTENNA LIGHTENING ARRESTER
10.1.2 Functions
GPS antenna lightening arrester uses two frequency-divided coaxial cable protectors. The
lightening protection device is installed where the communication devices connects with
the coaxial cable, or between the two communication devices. It can effectively prevent the
damage on the communication device by the temporary over-voltage due to the lightening
induction.
This device uses high-frequency filter and take Level-3 protection on the DC feeder path.
The product has less RF insertion loss, large current capacity, and low limited voltage. In
addition, it has all functions of the frequency divider. It is the ideal protection device for all
common antenna communication devices.
10.1.3 Connections
The connection of ICMG and GPS antenna lightening arrester (fixed on the cabinet top)
or GPS antenna is as shown in Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3 CONNECTION OF ICMG AND GPS ACTIVE ANTENNA/LIGHTENING
ARRESTER
1. GPS antenna
2. GPS antenna lightening

arrester

1. The technical parameters of GPS active antenna are as shown in Table 10-1.
10-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 10 Other Devices and Accessories
Table 10-1 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF GPS ACTIVE ANTENNA

Parameter
Indices
Frequency range
1575 5 MHz
Gains
382 dBi
DC voltage
4.5~6 V
DC current
< 35
Antenna interface
N (F) mode
Anti surge immunity performance
Compliant with GB/T17626.5-1999
2. The technical parameters of lightening arrester are as shown in Table 10-2.

Table 10-2 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF LIGHTENING ARRESTER
Parameter
Indices
Frequency range
1500~1600 MHz
Characteristic resistance
50
Insertion loss
4 dB
VSWR
1.2
Isolation
20 dB
Max transmission power
50 W
DC feeder voltage
4.75~5.25 V
Rated current capacity
10 KA (8/20 s)
Rest voltage
20 V
Waterproof level IP
IP65
Interface mode
Input is N-F and 2-channel output is SMA-F
Installation mode
Installing through holes

The section of the grounding cable is over 6
Grounding cable specifications
mm2
10.2 Alarm Box

10.2.1 Composition of the Alarm System
Alarm system gives users quick and timely information on the defective issues occuring
to the equipments. In the case of a failure with the communication system or any
improperly operating status of the system, the equipment sends the alarm information
to the background server through which users may review the current alarm or historic
10-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
alarm. Also the server sends the alarm information to the alarm box which makes audio
and visual alarms as well as sending alarm message to the cell phone number predefined.
The alarm system consists of the alarm server (usually the OMC server) and the alarm
box, as shown in Figure 10-4.
Figure 10-4 Alarm System
The alarm server allows the administrators to set such parameters as the levels of
alarms to be sent to the alarm box, the mobile phone numbers to send alarm SMS
messages.
The alarm server sends alarm messages to alarm box through TCP/IP protocol, and
the mobile phone module in the alarm box delivers the alarm SMS messages to the
mobile phone number as specified.
The alarm box then displays the alarms on LCD screen with alarm indicators, alarm
server indicators and alarm sounds.
10.2.2 Alarm Box Function

The alarm box is connected to the alarm server through the hub to receive alarm data from
the server. It reports alarms with alarm indicators and sounds for different alarm severity.
Meanwhile, it displays alarm messages on the LCD.
l
l
l
l
Through proper settings on the alarm server, the built-in mobile phone module in the
alarm box sends current alarms to the mobile phones of the maintenance staff. Alarms
can be set according to preset severity levels. Alarm box supports CDMA or GSM
system, but not both.
Audio alarm: the built-in speaker of the alarm box reports alarms with beeps and the
current alarm severity with real voices.
Alarm Indicator: alarms of different severity levels are indicated by LEDs of different
colors (yellow, amber, blue and red in the ascending order of alarm severity).
Alarm server indicator: the alarm box panel has 10 LED indicators that are connected
to 10 groups of alarm servers (usually 10 servers). The indicators report the status of
each group of alarm servers, such as link status, alarm status, etc.
LCD display of alarm information: the alarms from alarm server are displayed on the
LCD screen of the alarm box. Users may press the alarm menu and panel buttons to
set the alarm box parameters, such as the IP address, the UIP port number, button
sound switch control, and backlight control.
Remote access: the alarm box can connect to a server in the same network segment,
or a remote server in a different network segment. In the latter case, a route on the
10-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 10 Other Devices and Accessories
l
l
l
l
l
alarm box is needed. Therefore, the alarm box need not be placed in the computer
room. It can be placed in the office or the meeting room, which increases its flexibility.
Multiple office integration: the alarm box supports up to 128 alarm servers, which
can be classified into 10 groups.Usually, these servers are not in the same network
segment, so this function needs support from the remote connection function.
Support inter-VLAN alarm servers: the alarm box may be connected to the alarm
servers in different VLANs through the layer-2 switch. This cross-VLAN connectivity
eliminates the need for a high-cost layer-3 switch, while ensuring the separation of
alarm servers from each other.
Network storm detection and alarm: proper setting of the network storm threshold on
the alarm box helps you to avoid network congestion caused by data broadcast.
Alarm group identification: the alarm box confirms alarms on the per-group basis.
Static query of the alarm information: the alarm box can query the statistical data of
alarms of different severity levels on connected alarm servers.
Permanent muting: user may mute the alarms according to their severity levels on the
alarm box.
Remote operation: users may log in to the alarm box with Telnet, and complete
alarm server configuration, router configuration, VLAN configuration, SMS parameter
configuration and time parameter configuration with MML commands.
10.2.3 Technical Specifications

The technical specifications of alarm box are as shown below.
Physical Dimension: 323 mm 220 mm 58 mm (Length Width Depth)
Power: -48 V DC power; Support 90 V264 V AC current (power adapter needed)
Power consumption: 40W
Interface: one RJ-45 net port
Operating temperature: 0-45
10-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
10-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 11
System Configuration
Description
Table of Contents
Typical Single Rack Configuration of ZXWR RNC ....................................................11-1
Double-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC ........................................................11-2
Triple-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC...........................................................11-3
Cable Connections for Single-Rack Configuration ....................................................11-4
Cable Connections for Dual-Rack Configuration.......................................................11-6
Cable Connections for Triple-Rack Configuration .....................................................11-9
External Signal Cable Connections for Typical Configurations ................................ 11-17
External Equipment and Accessories ..................................................................... 11-18
11.1 Typical Single Rack Configuration of ZXWR RNC

A typical single rack configuration of ZXWR RNC is shown in Figure 11-1. The system
consists of two control shelves and two resource shelves. GIPI3 or GIPI4 boards can be
configured if the Iu interface is in IP transmission, or APBE boards can be configured if the
Iu interface is in ATM transmission.
Note:
The figure below shows a typically-configured single rack when the Iu interface is in IP
transmission.
The GIPI3 boards in the figure can be replaced by GIPI4 boards.
11-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figure 11-1 Typical Single Rack Configuration of ZXWR RNC
11.2 Double-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC

When both Iub interface and Iu interface support IP transmission, the system needs two
racks for full configurations, as shown in Figure 11-2.
Figure 11-2 Double-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC
11-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 11 System Configuration Description
11.3 Triple-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC

When the Iub interface supports ATM transmission and the Iu interface supports IP
transmission, the system needs three racks for full configurations, as shown in Figure
11-3.
Figure 11-3 Triple-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC
11-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
11.4 Cable Connections for Single-Rack Configuration

The cable connections for single-rack configuration are shown in Table 11-1.
Note:
In Table 11-1, #1_L2_S[13](RCKG1)_CLKOUT (lower) indicates the lower CLKOUT
interface on the RCKG1 board in slot 13 of shelf 2, rack 1.
11-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 11-1 CABLE CONNECTIONS for SINGLE-RACK CONFIGURATION

Termination
Cable
Remarks
End A
End B
B1
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_CLKIN
#1_L2_S[13](RCKG1)
_CLKOUT (lower)
B2
This cable connects

#1_L1_GUIM to ICM.
This cable connects
#1_L4_GUIM to ICM.
H-CLK-003
B1
#1_L2_S[14](RCKG2)
_CLKOUT(lower)
#1_L1_S[7](RGIM1)_8
KOUT
B2
KOUT
#1_L2_S[11](RMPB)_
PD485
#1_Cabinet_Top_Fan
H-ETH-009
This cable connects

#1_L4_GUIM to ICM.
#1_L2_S[13](RCKG1)_8KIN1
These cables extract line clock
H-CLK-004
#1_L4_S[7](RGIM1)_8
This cable connects

#1_L1_GUIM to ICM.
for CLKG.
#1_L2_S[13](RCKG1)_8KIN2
#1_PDM_RS485 (upper)
This cable is a 485 cable from

ROMB to PDM.
#1_PDM_FAN BOX1
These four cables are used as
#1_FANCX[1-3]_Monitor
#1_L2_S[9](RUIM2)_
FE1
#1_PDM_FAN BOX2-4
#1_L2_S[1](RSVB)_OMP1
fan monitoring cables.

This
cable
connects
#1_L2_SBCX to UIMC.
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B1
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_FE3
Odd FE33-45
B2
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_FE5
These cables connect
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B1
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_FE4
#1_L1_GUIM to THUB.
Even FE34-46
B2
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_FE6
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B3
#1_L3_S[9](RUIM2)_FE7
Odd FE33-45
B4
#1_L3_S[9](RUIM2)_FE9
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B3
#1_L3_S[10](RUIM3)_FE8
#1_L3_UIMC to THUB.
Even FE34-46
B4
#1_L3_S[10](RUIM3)_FE10
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B5
#1_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_FE3
Odd FE33-45
B6
#1_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_FE5
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B5
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_FE4
#1_L4_GUIM to THUB.
Even FE34-46
B6
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_FE6
H-ETH-008
11-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
End A
#1_L1_S[9](GUIM)_TX/RX1
#1_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
Internal
fiber
(LC-LC single mode)
TX/RX1
#1_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX2
End B
#1_L4_S[9](GUIM)_RX/TX1
#1_L4_S[9]( GUIM)_RX/TX2
These fibers connect #1_L1 to
#1_L4 directly.
#1_L4_S[10](GUIM)_RX/TX1
#1_L4_S[10]( GUIM)_RX/TX2
11.5 Cable Connections for Dual-Rack Configuration

The cable connections for dual-rack configuration are shown in Table 11-2.
Note:
Table 11-2 CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR DUAL-RACK CONFIGURATION
Termination
Cable
Remarks
End A
End B
B1
B2
#1_L2_S[13](RCKG1)_
CLKOUT (lower)
B3
B4
H-CLK003
B1
B2
#1_L2_S[14](RCKG2)_
CLKOUT (lower)
B3
B4
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_CL-
This cable connects #1_L1_GUIM
KIN
to ICM.
#1_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_CL-
KIN
to ICM.
#2_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_CL-
KIN
to ICM.
#2_L3_S[9](RGUM1)_CL-
KIN
to ICM.
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_CL-
KIN
to ICM.
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_CL-
KIN
to ICM.
#2_L1_S[10](RGUM1)_CL-
KIN
to ICM.
#2_L3_S[10](RGUM1)_CL-
KIN
to ICM.
11-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
End A
End B
Power splitter lightening

RF feeder
#1_L2_S[13](ICM)_GPS
arrester on the top of

the rack
#1_L2_S[11](RMPB)_
PD485
#1_Cabinet_Top_Fan
These cables connect power splitter

lightening arrester to ICM.
This cable is a 485 cable from
ROMB to PDM.
#1_PDM_FAN BOX1
These four cables are used as fan
H-ETH-
#2_PDM_RS485
009
per)
(up-
#2_Cabinet_Top_Fan
#1_PDM_FAN BOX2-4
#1_PDM_RS485 (lower)
monitoring cables.
This cable is a 485 cable used for
cascading racks.
#2_PDM_FAN BOX1
These four cables are used as fan
#1_L2_S[9](RUIM2)_
FE1
#2_PDM_FAN BOX2-4
monitoring cables.
This cable connects #1_L2_SBCX
to UIMC.
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B1
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_FE3
Odd FE33-45
B2
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_FE5
These cables connect #1_L1_GUIM
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B1
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_FE4
to THUB.
Even FE34-46
B2
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_FE6
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B3
#1_L3_S[9](RUIM2)_FE7
Odd FE33-45
B4
#1_L3_S[9](RUIM2)_FE9
These cables connect #1_L3_UIMC
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B3
#1_L3_S[10](RUIM3)_FE8
to THUB.
Even FE34-46
B4
#1_L3_S[10](RUIM3)_FE10
H-ETH-
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B5
#1_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_FE3
008
Odd FE33-45
B6
#1_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_FE5
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B5
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_FE4
to THUB.
Even FE34-46
B6
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_FE6
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B1
#2_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_FE3
Odd FE17-31
B2
#2_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_FE5
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B1
#2_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_FE4
to THUB.
Even FE18-32
B2
#2_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_FE6
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B3
#2_L2_S[9](RGUM1)_FE3
Odd FE17-31
B4
#2_L2_S[9](RGUM1)_FE5
to THUB.
11-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
End A
End B
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B3
#2_L2_S[10](RGUM2)_FE4
Even FE18-32
B4
#2_L2_S[10](RGUM2)_FE6
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_
B5
#2_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_FE3
Odd FE17-31
B6
#2_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_FE5
#1_L2_S16(RCHB2)_
B5
#2_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_FE4
to THUB.
Even FE18-32
B6
#2_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_FE6
#1_L1_S[9](GUIM)_T-
#2_L4_S[1](GLI)_RX/TX1
X/RX1
#1_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX1
#1_L1_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX2
#1_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX2
#1_L1_S[9](GUIM)_T-
These fibers connect #1_L1_GUIM

to the optical interfaces of GLI.
X/RX3
#1_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX3
Internal
#1_L1_S[9](GUIM)_Tfiber
X/RX4
(LC-LC
single
mode)
#1_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX4
#1_L4_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX1
#1_L4_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX1
#1_L4_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX2
#1_L4_S[10](GUIM)_

TX/RX2
#1_L4_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX3
#1_L4_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX3
11-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
End A
#1_L4_S[9](GUIM)_T-
End B
X/RX4
#1_L4_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX4
#2_L1_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX1
#2_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX1
#2_L1_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX2
#2_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX2

#2_L1_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX3
#2_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX3
#2_L1_S[9](GUIM)_T-
X/RX4
#2_L1_S[10](GUIM)_
TX/RX4
11.6 Cable Connections for Triple-Rack Configuration

The cable connections for triple-rack configuration are shown in Table 11-3.
Note:
11-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 11-3 CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR TRIPLE-RACK CONFIGURATION

Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
End B
B1
B2
B3
#1_L2_S[13](R-
This cable connects #1_L1_GUIM to ICM.
This cable connects #1_L3_GUIM to CLKG.
CKG1)_CLKOUT
(lower)
B4
B5
B6
B1
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
B2
#1_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
H-CLK-003
B3
#1_L2_S[14](R-
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
CKG2)_CLKOUT
(lower)
B4
#2_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
B5
#2_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
B6
#3_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
B1
#1_L2_S[13](R-
CKG1)_CLKOUT
(upper)
B2
B1
#1_L2_S[14](R-
#3_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
CKG2)_CLKOUT
(upper)
B2
#3_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
CLKIN
11-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
Power
RF feeder
End B
splitter
lightening
ar-
rester on the top
These cables connect power splitter lighten#1_L2_S[14](ICM)_GPS
ing arrester to ICM.
of the rack
#1_L2_S[11](RMPB)_PD485
#1_Cabi-
These four cables are used as fan monitor-
#1_FANCX[13]_Monitor
#2_PDM_RS485
(upper)
#2_Cabi-
ing cables.
#1_PDM_FAN BOX2-4
This cable is a 485 cable used for cascading

racks.
#2_PDM_FAN BOX1
net_Top_Fan
H-ETH-009
#3_PDM_RS485
(upper)
#3_Cabi-
ing cables.
#2_PDM_FAN BOX2-4
This cable is a 485 cable used for cascading

racks.
#3_PDM_FAN BOX1
net_Top_Fan
#1_L2_S[9](RUIM2)_FE1
ing cables.
#3_PDM_FAN BOX2-4
B1
#1_L2_S15(RC-
This cable connects #1_L2_SBCX to UIMC.
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
FE3
B2
3-45
B1
#1_L2_S16(RH-ETH-008
PDM.
#1_PDM_FAN BOX1
net_Top_Fan
HB1)_Odd
This cable is a 485 cable from ROMB to
#1_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE5
These cables connect #1_L1_GUIM to
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
THUB.
FE4
CHB2)_Even
B2
FE34-46
#1_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
B3
#1_L2_S15(RCHB1)_Odd
3-45
#1_L3_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
#1_L3_S[9](RGUM1)_
THUB.
FE3
B4
FE5
11-11
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
End B
B3
#1_L2_S16(R-
#1_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE4
CHB2)_Even
B4
FE34-46
#1_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
B5
#1_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
FE3
B6
3-45
B5
#1_L2_S16(R-
#1_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE5
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
THUB.
FE4
CHB2)_Even
B6
FE34-46
#1_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
B1
#2_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
FE1
B2
7-31
B1
#1_L2_S16(R-
#2_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE5
#2_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
THUB.
FE4
CHB2)_Even
B2
FE18-32
#2_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
B3
#2_L2_S[9](RUIM2)_
FE7
FE1
B4
7-31
B3
#1_L2_S16(R-
#2_L2_S[9](RUIM2)_
FE9
#2_L2_S[10](RUIM3)_
THUB.
FE8
CHB2)_Even
B4
FE18-32
#2_L2_S[10](RUIM3)_FE10
B5
#2_L3_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
FE1
7-31
B6
B5
#1_L2_S16(R-
#2_L3_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE5
#2_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
THUB.
FE4
CHB2)_Even
FE18-32
B6
#2_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
11-12
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
End B
B7
#2_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
FE1
7-31
B8
B7
#1_L2_S16(R-
#2_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE5
#2_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
THUB.
FE4
CHB2)_Even
FE18-32
B8
#2_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
B1
#1_L2_S15(RC-
#3_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
HB1)_Odd FE1-1
5
B2
B1
#1_L2_S16(R-
#3_L1_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE5
#3_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
THUB.
FE4
CHB2)_Even
FE2-16
B2
#3_L1_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
B3
#1_L2_S15(RC-
#3_L2_S[9](RUIM2)_
FE7
HB1)_Odd FE1-1
5
B4
B3
#1_L2_S16(R-
#3_L2_S[9](RUIM2)_
FE9
#3_L2_S[10](RUIM3)_
THUB.
FE8
CHB2)_Even
FE2-16
B4
#3_L2_S[10](RUIM3)_FE10
B5
#1_L2_S15(RC-
#3_L3_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
HB1)_Odd FE1-1
5
B6
B5
#1_L2_S16(R-
#3_L3_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE5
#3_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
THUB.
FE4
CHB2)_Even
FE2-16
B6
#3_L3_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
B7
#1_L2_S15(RC-
#3_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_
FE3
#3_L4_S[9](RGUM1)_
THUB.
HB1)_Odd FE1-1
5
B8
FE5
11-13
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
End B
B7
#1_L2_S16(R-
#3_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE4
CHB2)_Even
FE2-16
B8
#3_L4_S[10](RGUM2)_
FE6
#1_L1_S[10](G-
Internal
fiber
UIM)_TX/RX4
(LC-LC sin-
#1_L3_S[9](GUI-
gle mode)
M)_TX/RX1
These fibers connect #1_L1_GUIM to the
optical interfaces of GLI.
11-14
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
End B
11-15
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
End B
11-16
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Termination
Cable
Remarks
Ends A
End B
11.7 External Signal Cable Connections for Typical

Configurations
The external signal cable connections for typical configurations are shown in Table 11-4.
11-17
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 11-4 External Signal Cable Connections for Typical Configurations

Cable
Termination
RNC side
Explanation
External
(RMPB) _OMC2
Both ends are RJ45

connector. Generally,
(RGER) _GE1-2
these cables are CAT-5

cables. However,
H-ETH-009 cables are
Ethernet Cable
External HUB or PC
used instead to connect

HUB, and H-ETH-004
(RSVB) _OMC1
cables are used instead

to connect PC. Each
rack is equipped with
one set of these cables.
(APBE) _LC1-4
LC/PC-SC/PC optical
fiber connections
(SDTI) _LC1-2
are used at the

Node B side.
Optical fiber
Distribution frame
LC/PC-LC/PC optical
fiber connections are
(SDTA2) _LC1-2
used at the CN side.

Single mode fibers are
used in both cases.
These cables are
(RDTB) _E1_1-32
H-E1-003 or H-E1-004
E1
Distribution frame
(RDTA) _E1_1-32
cables. One end

is DB68, the other
depends on actual
needs.
N-type male
connectors are used.
Power splitter
Feeder
lightening arrester
GPS antenna
on the top of the rack
This cable is needed

when ICM/ICMG is
configured in the
system.
11.8 External Equipment and Accessories

1. 1 G switch is obligatory to be configured. Two switches (M/S) should be configured
for one ZXWR RNC, to connect ZXWR RNC and other NEs, such as, Node B.
11-18
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
2. One GPS and one lightening arrester are required to be configured when ICMG is
used.
11-19
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
11-20
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 12
Hardware Quick Reference

Table of Contents
Relationship between Shelf and Backplane ..............................................................12-1
Board Function Quick Index ....................................................................................12-1
Board Hardware (PCB) Quick Index ........................................................................12-4
Processor Quick Index ............................................................................................12-6
A Quick Index for Function Board, PCB and Logic Processor ..................................12-7
Front Board and Rear Board Relation Quick Index ..................................................12-8
Apparatus Legends Quick Reference .......................................................................12-9
12.1 Relationship between Shelf and Backplane

The relationship between shelf and backplane is shown in Table 12-1.
Table 12-1 RELATION OF SHELF AND BACKPLANE
SN
Shelf
Backplane
Switching shelf
BPSN
Control shelf
BCTC
GE resource shelf
BGSN
GE interface shelf
BGSN
12.2 Board Function Quick Index

SN
1
Item
ATM
Code
Process
Board
APBE
Enhanced
2
ATM
ATM
Process
Board
Enhanced
Process
Board
APBI
with IMA
ATM
Process
Board
with IMA
Backplane of ConTrol
Center
Backplane Of Giga Uni-
BCTC
Backplane of ConTrol
BGSN
Center
Backplane Of Giga Uni-
versal Service Network

5
Code Meaning
Backplane of Packet
Switch Network
versal Service Network

BPSN
Backplane of Packet
Switch Network
12-1
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
SN
Item
Code
Clock Generator
Digital
Trunk
Board
Code Meaning
CLKG
Clock Generator
DTA
Digital
ATM version
Trunk
Board
ATM version
Digital Trunk Board
DTB
Digital Trunk Board
Digital Trunk Board IP
DTI
Digital Trunk Board IP
version
version
10
E1 IP Interface
EIPI
E1 IP Interface
11
E3/T3 ATM Interface
ET3A
E3/T3 ATM Interface
Board
12
E3/T3
Board
IP
Interface
ET3I
Board
E3/T3
IP
Interface
Board
13
Fan Box Connect
FBC
Fan Box Connect
14
Fan Control Board
FCB
Fan Control Board
15
Gigabit IP Interface
GIPI
Gigabit IP Interface
16
Gigabit IP Interface 3
GIPI3
17
GIPI4
18
Gigabit Line Interface
GLI
Gigabit Line Interface
19
GE Universal Interface
GUIM
Module
20
Module
Integrated Clock Mod-
ICM
ule
21
Integrated Clock Module
Integrated Clock Mod-
ICMG
ule (GPS)
Integrated Clock Module (GPS)
22
IMA Board
IMAB
IMA Board
23
Power & Environment
PEM
Power & Environment
Monitor Board
24
Monitor Board
Power & Environment
PEMB
Monitor Backboard
Power & Environment

Monitor Backboard
25
POS Interface Board
POSI
POS Interface Board
26
Packet Switch Network
PSN
Packet Switch Network
27
PWRD FAN LED
PWRDL
PWRD FAN LED
RNC Control plane pro-
RCB
RNC Control plane pro-
28
cessing Board
cessing Board
29
Rear Board 1 of CHUB
RCHB1
30
RCHB2
12-2
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Chapter 12 Hardware Quick Reference
SN
Item
Code
Code Meaning
31
Rear Board 1 of CLKG
RCKG1
32
RCKG2
33
Rear Board of DTA
RDTA
Rear Board of DTA
34
Rear Board of DTB
RDTB
Rear Board of DTB
35
Rear
RGER
Rear
Giga
Ethernet
Board of Resource
36
General Rear Interface
38
Ethernet
Board of Resource
RGIM1
Module 1
37
Giga
General Rear Interface

Module 1
Rear Board of Gigabit
RGUM1
universal Interface
universal Interface
Module 1
Module 1
RGUM2
universal Interface
universal Interface
Module 2
Module 2
39
Rear Board of MNIC
RMNIC
Rear Board of MNIC
40
Rear Low-speed Inter-
RLIB
Rear Low-speed Inter-
face Board
face Board
41
Rear Board of MPB
RMPB
Rear Board of MPB
42
RNC Operating & Main-
ROMB
RNC Operating & Main-
tenance Board
43
Rearcard
tenance Board
of
SerVe
RSVB
Board
44
Rearcard
of
SerVe
Board
RNC User plane pro-
RUB
cessing Board
RNC User plane processing Board
45
Rear Board 2 of UIM
RUIM2
Rear Board 2 of UIM
46
Rear Board 3 of UIM
RUIM3
Rear Board 3 of UIM
X86 Single Board Com-
SBCX
47
puter
48
Sonet
Digital
Trunk
SDTA
Board ATM version

49
Sonet
Digital
Trunk
Sonet
Digital
Trunk
SDTA2
Sonet
Digital
Trunk
Sonet
Digital
Trunk
Board ATM version 2

SDTB2
Board 2
51
Sonet
Board ATM version
Board ATM version 2

50
X86 Single Board Computer
Sonet
Digital
Trunk
Digital
Trunk
Board 2
Digital
Trunk
Board IP version
SDTI
Sonet
Board IP version
12-3
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
SN
Item
52
Trunk HUB
53
Universal
Code
Interface
Code Meaning
THUB
Trunk HUB
UIMC
Universal
Module of BCTC
Interface
Module of BCTC
12.3 Board Hardware (PCB) Quick Index

SN
1
ITEM
Code
ATM Process Board

Enhanced version
ATM Process Board
Enhanced version 2
Backplane of Control
Center
Code meaning
APBE
APBE/2
BCTC
Backplane Of Giga
4
Universal Service
6
7
Backplane of Packet
Switch Network
Control Plane HUB
Digital Trunk board
with ATM
Digital Trunk with Echo
Cancellation
Digital Trunk Board
IP version
Enhanced version
ATM Process Board
Enhanced version 2
Backplane of Control
Center
Backplane Of Giga
BGSN
Network
5
ATM Process Board
Universal Service
Network
BPSN
CHUB
DTA
DTEC
DTI
Backplane of Packet
Switch Network
Control Plane HUB
Digital Trunk board
with ATM
Digital Trunk with Echo
Cancellation
Digital Trunk Board
IP version
10
Fan Box Connect
FBC
Fan Box Connect
11
Fan Control Board
FCB
Fan Control Board
12
Vitesse Quad GE GLI
GLIQV
Vitesse Quad GE GLI
13
Vitesse Quad GE GLI 2
GLIQV/2
Vitesse Quad GE GLI 2
14
Module
GUIM
Module
15
Integrated CLK Module
ICM
Integrated CLK Module
16
IMA Board
IMAB
IMA Board
12-4
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
SN
ITEM
Code
Code meaning
Multi-service Network
17
18
Interface Card
MNIC/2
version 2
version 2
Interface Card
MNIC/3
version 3
19
20
21
Interface Card
Main Processing board

based on X86 version 2
Vitesse Packet Switch
Network 40Gbps
Network 40Gbps 2
Interface Card
version 3
MPX86/2
PSN4V
PSN4V/2
Main Processing board

based on X86 version 2
Network 40Gbps
Network 40Gbps 2
22
Power Distributor LED
PWRDL
Power Distributor LED
23
Rear Board of CHUB
RCHB
Rear Board of CHUB
24
RCKG1
25
RCKG2
26
27
28
29
Rear Digital Trunk

Board ATM version
Rear Board of DTB 2
Rear Giga Ethernet
Board
General Rear Board 1
RDTA
RDTB/2
RGEB
RGIM1

30
universal Interface
32
33
34
35
36
Rear Low-speed
Interface Board
Rearcard of SerVe
Board
Rear Board of UIM
X86 Single Board
Computer
Sonet Digital Trunk
Board 2
Universal Interface
Module 2
Board ATM version

Rear Board of DTB 2
Rear Giga Ethernet
Board
General Rear Board 1
RGUM
Module
31
Rear Digital Trunk
universal Interface
Module
RLIB
RSVB
RUIM
SBCX
SDTB/2
UIM/2
Rear Low-speed
Interface Board
Rearcard of SerVe
Board
Rear Board of UIM
X86 Single Board
Computer
Sonet Digital Trunk
Board 2
Universal Interface
Module 2
12-5
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
SN
ITEM
Code
Voice Transcoder Card
37
DSP Version
38
DSP Version 2
Code meaning
VTCD
DSP Version
VTCD/2
DSP Version 2
12.4 Processor Quick Index

SN
1
3
4
Name
Code
Code meaning
Note
Trunk HUB
THUB
Trunk HUB
On the THUB
Integrated CLK
On the CLKG,
Module
ICMG
Integrated CLK
ICM
Module
Digital Trunk
DTB
Board
E3/T3 Processor
ET3P
E1 Universal
5
10
11
Interface
EUIP
GE Universal
GUIM
Interface Module
RNC IMA
IMAP
Processor
RNC ATM
RAP
Processor
RNC Control
RCP
plane Processor
RNC Universal IP
RUIB
Interface Board
RNC Signaling
RSP
Processor
14
Interface
GE Universal
Interface Module
RNC IMA
Processor
On the DTB
On the E3TI
On the EIPI, DTI,
SDTI
On the GUIM
On the IMAB
RNC ATM
On the APBE,
Processor
DTA, SDTA2
RNC Control
plane Processor
On the RCB
RNC Universal IP
On the GIPI,
Interface Board
GIPI3, GIPI4
RNC Signaling
Processor
On the RCB
RNC Operating
& Maintenance
ROMP
Processor
13
E3/T3 Processor
Processor
RNC Operating
12
Board
E1 Universal
Processor
6
Digital Trunk
& Maintenance
On the ROMB
Processor
Router Protocol
RPU
Unit
RNC User plane
RUP
Processor
Router Protocol
Unit
RNC User plane
Processor
On the ROMB
On the RUB
12-6
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
SN
Name
Code
Sonet Digital
15
Universal
On the SDTB
Trunk Board
UIM
Interface Module
Note
Sonet Digital
SDTB
Trunk Board
16
Code meaning
Universal
On the UIMC
Interface Module
and UIMU
12.5 A Quick Index for Function Board, PCB and Logic

Processor
SN
Function Board
PCB
(Panel Name)
Related Logic
Related Rear
Processor
Board
APBE
APBE & APBE/2
RAP
RGIM1
APBI
APBE/2
RAP
CLKG
ICM
ICM
RCKG1 & RCKG2
DTA
DTA
RAP
RDTA
DTB
DTEC
DTB
RDTB
DTI
DTI
EUIP
RDTA
EIPI
MNIC/2
EUIP
ET3A
APBE/2
RAP
RLIB
ET3I
MNIC/2
ET3P
RLIB
10
GIPI
MNIC/2
RUIB
RGER & RMNIC
11
GIPI3
MNIC/3
RUIB
RGER & RGER2
12
GIPI4
MNIC/3
RUIB
RGER & RGER2
13
GLI
GLIQV & GLIQV/2
GLI
GUIM
GUIM
GUIM
15
ICM
ICM
ICM
RCKG1 & RCKG2
16
ICMG
ICM
ICM
RCKG1 & RCKG2
17
IMAB
IMAB
IMAP
18
POSI
MNIC/2
POSI
RGIM1
PSN
14
19
PSN
PSN4V
PSN4V/2
&
RGUM1
&
RGUM2
20
RCB
MPX86/2
RCP & RSP
21
RCKG1
RCKG1
12-7
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Function Board
SN
PCB
(Panel Name)
Related Logic
Related Rear
Processor
Board
22
RCKG2
RCKG2
23
RCHB1
RCHB
24
RCHB2
RCHB
25
RDTA
RDTA
26
RDTB
RDTB/2
27
RGER
RGEB
28
RGIM1
RGIM1
29
RGUM1
RGUM
30
RGUM2
RGUM
31
RLIB
RLIB
32
RMPB
RGIM1
33
ROMB
MPX86/2
ROMP & RPU
RMPB
34
RSVB
RSVB
35
RUB
VTCD & VTCD/2
RUP
36
RUIM2
RUIM
37
RUIM3
RUIM
38
SBCX
SBCX
RSVB
39
SDTA
DTA
RAP
40
SDTA2
DTA
RAP
41
SDTB2
SDTB/2
SDTB
42
SDTI
DTI
EUIP
43
THUB
CHUB
THUB
RCHB1 & RCHB2
44
UIMC
UIM/2
UIM
RUIM2 & RUIM3
12.6 Front Board and Rear Board Relation Quick Index

SN
Front Board Name
Rear Board Name
APBE
RGIM1
APBI
RGIM1
CLKG
RCKG1, RCKG2
DTA
RDTA
DTB
RDTB
12-8
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
SN
Front Board Name
Rear Board Name
DTI
RDTA
EIPI
ET3A
RLIB
ET3I
RLIB
10
GIPI
RGER, which provides GE port

RMNIC, which provides FE port
11
GIPI3
RGER, RGER2
12
GIPI4
RGER, RGER2
13
GLI
14
GUIM
RGUM1, RGUM2
15
ICM
RCKG1, RCKG2
16
ICMG
RCKG1, RCKG2
17
IMAB
18
PEM
19
POSI
20
PSN
21
RCB
22
ROMB
RMPB
23
RUB
24
SBCX
RSVB
25
SDTA
26
SDTA2
27
SDTI
28
SDTB2
29
THUB
RCHB1, RCHB2
30
UIMC
RUIM2, RUIM3
12.7 Apparatus Legends Quick Reference

The legends of the apparatus are as shown in Table 12-2.
12-9
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Table 12-2 LEGEND OF APPARATUS

Apparatus
Legend
Description
Seen from the front of the
RJ45
circuit panel
DB9
circuit panel
DB44
circuit panel
Fiber output
circuit panel
USB
interface
circuit panel
The black block indicates the

location of DIP switch. If it is
in OFF location, it indicates
DIP switch
the default value is OFF. Vice

versa.
The left diagram indicates
that the default setting is short
circuit. The right diagram
Jumper
indicates the default location

is the short circuit. So are the
jumpers.
12-10
SJ-20100603155704-008|2010-12-03(R2.3)
Figures
Figure 1-1 Physical Appearance ............................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2 Top View .................................................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1-3 Bottom View ............................................................................................ 1-3
Figure 1-4 Cabinet Components ............................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-5 STRUCTURE OF FRONT/REAR DOOR ................................................. 1-6
Figure 1-6 STRUCTURE OF RACK .......................................................................... 1-7
Figure 1-7 STRUCTURE OF BUSBAR ..................................................................... 1-8
Figure 2-1 SUBRACK LAYOUT ................................................................................ 2-2
Figure 2-2 STRUCTURE OF PDM SUBRACK .......................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3 PANEL OF PDM SUBRACK .................................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-4 STRUCTURE OF FAN SUBRACK ........................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-5 PANEL OF FAN SUBRACK ..................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-6 STRUCTURE OF SERVICE SUBRACK .................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-7 SECTIONAL VIEW OF SERVICE SUBRACK .......................................... 2-9
Figure 2-8 STRUCTURE OF DUSTPROOF SUBRACK.......................................... 2-10
Figure 3-1 COMPOSITIONS OF SHELF................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2 ZXWR RNC CABINET CONFIGURATION (WITH LOW-SPEED
INTERFACE SHELF) .............................................................................. 3-3
Figure 3-3 CABINET CONFIGURATION (WITHOUT LOW-SPEED INTERFACE
SHELF)................................................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-4 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL SHELF (SINGLE
SHELF)................................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-5 FULL CONFIGURATION OF SWITCHING SHELF .................................. 3-9
Figure 3-6 Gigabit Resource Shelf Typical Configuration for ATM Access over Iu
............................................................................................................. 3-11
Figure 3-7 Gigabit Resource Shelf Typical Configuration for IP over Iu ................... 3-12
Figure 3-8 Gigabit Resource Shelf Configuration for IP over Iu, ATM CSTM-1 over
Iub ........................................................................................................ 3-12
Figure 3-9 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in Full E1 ACCESS MODE ....................... 3-15
Figure 3-10 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in FULL ATM CSTM-1 ACCESS
MODE................................................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3-11 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in Full IP CSTM-1 ACCESS
MODE................................................................................................... 3-16
Figure 3-12 TYPICAL CONFIGURATION in FULL STM-1 ACCESS MODE ............ 3-16
Figure 4-1 BOARD ASSEMBLY RELATION.............................................................. 4-2
Figure 6-1 STRUCTURE OF FRONT BOARD .......................................................... 6-2
Figure 6-2 The Schematic Diagram of the APBE ...................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-3 APBE PANEL........................................................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-4 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF APBE (APBE PHYSICAL
BOARD) ................................................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-5 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF APBE (APBE/2 PHYSICAL
BOARD) ................................................................................................. 6-9
Figure 6-6 The Schematic Diagram of the APBI...................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-7 APBI PANEL .......................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-8 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF APBI ....................................... 6-13
Figure 6-9 The Schematic Diagram of the CLKG .................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-10 CLKG PANEL ...................................................................................... 6-16
Figure 6-11 SWITCH ON CLKG PANEL.................................................................. 6-19
Figure 6-12 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF CLKG.................................... 6-21
Figure 6-13 DTA Board Panel Structure Diagram ................................................... 6-22
Figure 6-14 DTA board Configuration Diagram ...................................................... 6-24
Figure 6-15 The Schematic Diagram of the DTB ..................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-16 DTB PANEL ......................................................................................... 6-26
Figure 6-17 DIP SWITCH ON DTB PANEL ............................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-18 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF DTB ...................................... 6-29
Figure 6-19 DTI Board Panel Structure Diagram .................................................... 6-31
Figure 6-20 DTI board Configuration Diagram ........................................................ 6-33
Figure 6-21 The Schematic Diagram of the EIPI ..................................................... 6-34
Figure 6-22 EIPI PANEL ......................................................................................... 6-35
Figure 6-23 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF EIPI....................................... 6-36
Figure 6-24 The Schematic Diagram of the GIPI ..................................................... 6-38
Figure 6-25 GIPI PANEL ......................................................................................... 6-39
Figure 6-26 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF GIPI ...................................... 6-41
Figure 6-27 GIPI3 Board Panel ............................................................................... 6-42
Figure 6-28 GIPI3 Board Configuration ................................................................... 6-45
Figure 6-29 GIPI4 Board Panel ............................................................................... 6-46
Figure 6-30 GIPI4 Board Configuration ................................................................... 6-49
Figure 6-31 The Schematic Diagram of the GLI ...................................................... 6-50
Figure 6-32 GLI PANEL .......................................................................................... 6-51
II
Figures
Figure 6-33 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF GLI........................................ 6-53

Figure 6-34 The Schematic Diagram of the GUIM................................................... 6-55
Figure 6-35 GUIM PANEL....................................................................................... 6-56
Figure 6-36 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF GUIM .................................... 6-59
Figure 6-37 The Schematic Diagram of the ICM ..................................................... 6-61
Figure 6-38 ICM PANEL ......................................................................................... 6-62
Figure 6-39 DIP SWITCHES ON ICM PANEL ......................................................... 6-65
Figure 6-40 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF ICM ....................................... 6-66
Figure 6-41 The Schematic Diagram of the ICMG................................................... 6-68
Figure 6-42 ICMG PANEL....................................................................................... 6-69
Figure 6-43 DIP SWITCHES ON ICMG PANEL ...................................................... 6-72
Figure 6-44 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF ICMG .................................... 6-73
Figure 6-45 IMAB PANEL ....................................................................................... 6-75
Figure 6-46 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF IMAB..................................... 6-76
Figure 6-47 PWRD Board Panel ............................................................................. 6-78
Figure 6-48 PWRD Jumper (Default Set) ................................................................ 6-79
Figure 6-49 POSI PANEL........................................................................................ 6-81
Figure 6-50
CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF POSI .................................... 6-83
Figure 6-51 The Schematic Diagram of the PSN..................................................... 6-84

Figure 6-52 PSN PANEL......................................................................................... 6-85
Figure 6-53 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF PSN ...................................... 6-86
Figure 6-54 The Schematic Diagram of the RCB .................................................... 6-88
Figure 6-55 RCB PANEL......................................................................................... 6-89
Figure 6-56 DIP SWITCHES AND JUMPERS ON RCB PANEL .............................. 6-91
Figure 6-57 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCB ...................................... 6-93
Figure 6-58 The Schematic Diagram of the ROMB ................................................. 6-94
Figure 6-59 ROMB PANEL ..................................................................................... 6-95
Figure 6-60 DIP SWITCH AND JUMPER ON ROMB PANEL .................................. 6-97
Figure 6-61 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF ROMB ................................... 6-99
Figure 6-62 The Schematic Diagram of the RUB .................................................. 6-101
Figure 6-63 RUB PANEL....................................................................................... 6-103
Figure 6-64 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RUB .................................... 6-105
Figure 6-65 The Schematic Diagram of the SBCX ................................................ 6-106
Figure 6-66 SBCX PANEL .................................................................................... 6-108
Figure 6-67 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF SBCX...................................6-111
III
Figure 6-68 The Schematic Diagram of the SDTA................................................. 6-112

Figure 6-69 SDTA PANEL..................................................................................... 6-113
Figure 6-70 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF SDTA .................................. 6-114
Figure 6-71 SDTA2 Board Panel Structure Diagram ............................................. 6-116
Figure 6-72 SDTA2 Board Configuration Diagram ................................................ 6-118
Figure 6-73 The Schematic Diagram of the SDTB2............................................... 6-120
Figure 6-74 SDTB2 PANEL................................................................................... 6-121
Figure 6-75 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF SDTB2 ................................ 6-123
Figure 6-76 SDTI Board Panel Structure Diagram ................................................ 6-124
Figure 6-77 SDTI Board Configuration Diagram ................................................... 6-126
Figure 6-78 Operating Principle of the THUB ........................................................ 6-128
Figure 6-79 THUB PANEL .................................................................................... 6-129
Figure 6-80 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF THUB.................................. 6-131
Figure 6-81
The Schematic Diagram of the UIMC ................................................ 6-132
Figure 6-82 UIMC PANEL ..................................................................................... 6-133

Figure 6-83 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS OF UIMC ................................ 6-135
Figure 7-1 STRUCTURE OF REAR BOARD............................................................. 7-2
Figure 7-2 RCHB1 PANEL ........................................................................................ 7-3
Figure 7-3 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCHB1 ..................................... 7-4
Figure 7-4 RCHB2 PANEL ........................................................................................ 7-5
Figure 7-5 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCHB2 ..................................... 7-6
Figure 7-6 RCKG1 PANEL........................................................................................ 7-7
Figure 7-7 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCKG1 ..................................... 7-8
Figure 7-8 RCKG2 PANEL........................................................................................ 7-9
Figure 7-9 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RCKG2 ................................... 7-10
Figure 7-10 RDTA Panel Structure Diagram ........................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-11 RDTA Board Configuration Diagram .................................................... 7-12
Figure 7-12 RDTB PANEL ...................................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-13 JUMPER ON RDTB PANEL................................................................. 7-14
Figure 7-14 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RDTB.................................... 7-15
Figure 7-15 RGER PANEL...................................................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-16 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGER ................................... 7-17
Figure 7-17 RGIM1 PANEL..................................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-18 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGIM1 .................................. 7-19
Figure 7-19 RGUM1 PANEL ................................................................................... 7-20
IV
Figures
Figure 7-20 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGUM1................................. 7-21

Figure 7-21 RGUM2 PANEL ................................................................................... 7-22
Figure 7-22 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RGUM2................................. 7-23
Figure 7-23 RMNIC PANEL .................................................................................... 7-24
Figure 7-24 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RMNIC .................................. 7-25
Figure 7-25 RMPB PANEL...................................................................................... 7-26
Figure 7-26 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RMPB ................................... 7-27
Figure 7-27 RSVB PANEL ...................................................................................... 7-28
Figure 7-28 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RSVB.................................... 7-29
Figure 7-29 RUIM2 PANEL ..................................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-30 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RUIM2 .................................. 7-31
Figure 7-31 RUIM3 PANEL ..................................................................................... 7-32
Figure 7-32 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENT OF RUIM3 .................................. 7-33
Figure 8-1 STRUCTURE OF BACKPLANE............................................................... 8-2
Figure 8-2 STRUCTURE OF BCTC .......................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8-3 STRUCTURE OF BGSN.......................................................................... 8-5
Figure 8-4 STRUCTURE OF BPSN .......................................................................... 8-7
Figure 8-5 STRUCTURE OF RBID ........................................................................... 8-9
Figure 8-6 JUMPER LAYOUT OF RBID.................................................................. 8-10
Figure 9-1
External Power Cable Physical Appearance .......................................... 9-2
Figure 9-2
Physical Appearance of Fan Shelf Power Cable ..................................... 9-3
Figure 9-3
Physical Appearance of Fan Subrack Power Cable ................................ 9-4
Figure 9-4 Service subrack external power cable Physical Appearance ................... 9-4
Figure 9-5 The Physical Appearance of Internal Power Cable for Service Subrack
............................................................................................................... 9-5
Figure 9-6 Cabinet Grounding Cable Physical Appearance ...................................... 9-6
Figure 9-7 Line Clock Cable Physical Appearance ................................................... 9-7
Figure 9-8 BITS Clock Cable Physical Appearance (120) ...................................... 9-8
Figure 9-9 BITS Clock Cable Physical Appearance (75) ........................................ 9-8
Figure 9-10
System Clock Distribution Cable Physical Appearance ...................... 9-10
Figure 9-11 THUB Cable Physical Appearance ...................................................... 9-12

Figure 9-12 Physical Appearance of Shielded Straight-through Cable .................... 9-15
Figure 9-13 Physical Appearance of External E1 Cable (75) ................................ 9-17
Figure 9-14 Physical Appearance of External E1 Cable (120) .............................. 9-19
Figure 9-15 External T1 Cable (100 unshielded) Physical Appearance ................ 9-21
Figure 9-16 External T1 cable (100 shielded) Physical Appearance .................... 9-22
V
Figure 9-17
Environment Monitor Adaptor Cable Physical Appearance ................. 9-24
Figure 9-18
Rack Front/Rear Access Control Cable Physical Appearance ............ 9-25
Figure 9-19
Machine Room Access Control Sensor Cable Physical Appearance

............................................................................................................. 9-26
Figure 9-20
IR Sensor Cable Physical Appearance ............................................... 9-27
Figure 9-21
Smoke Sensor Cable Physical Appearance ....................................... 9-28
Figure 9-22
H/T Sensor Cable Physical Appearance ............................................ 9-29
Figure 10-1 APPEARANCE OF GPS ACTIVE ANTENNA ...................................... 10-1

Figure 10-2 APPEARANCE OF GPS ANTENNA LIGHTENING ARRESTER ........... 10-2
Figure 10-3 CONNECTION OF ICMG AND GPS ACTIVE ANTENNA/LIGHTENING
ARRESTER .......................................................................................... 10-2
Figure 10-4 Alarm System ...................................................................................... 10-4
Figure 11-1 Typical Single Rack Configuration of ZXWR RNC ................................ 11-2
Figure 11-2 Double-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC .................................... 11-2
Figure 11-3 Triple-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC ...................................... 11-3
VI
Tables
Table 1-1 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF CABINET ................................................. 1-4
Table 2-1 SUBRACK CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CABINET ............................ 2-2
Table 2-2 LED INDICATOR ON PDM PANEL............................................................ 2-4
Table 2-3 SWITCH ON PDM PANEL......................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-4 INTERFACE ON PDM PANEL................................................................... 2-5
Table 2-5 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF PDM......................................................... 2-6
Table 2-6 LED INDICATOR ON FAN SUBRACK PANEL........................................... 2-7
Table 2-7 INTERFACE ON FAN SUBRACK PANEL .................................................. 2-8
Table 2-8 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF FAN SUBRACK........................................ 2-8
Table 2-9 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF SERVICE SUBRACK ............................. 2-10
Table 2-10 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF DUSTPROOF SUBRACK..................... 2-11
Table 3-1
Shelf Classification Explanation ............................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF SHELF ..................................................... 3-4

Table 3-3 CONFIGURATION PRINCIPLES OF CONTROL SHELF........................... 3-5
Table 3-4 CONFIGURATION PRINCIPLES ON SWITCHING SHELF ....................... 3-8
Table 3-5
Configuration Principles of Gigabit Resource Shelf Boards..................... 3-10
Table 3-6 CONFIGURATION PRINCIPLES OF INTERFACE SHELF ...................... 3-14

Table 4-1 BOARD DIMENSIONS .............................................................................. 4-3
Table 5-1 STATUS OF LED INDICATOR ON BOARD PANEL ................................... 5-1
Table 5-2 ENUM LED INDICATOR............................................................................ 5-2
Table 5-3 ACT LED INDICATOR ............................................................................... 5-2
Table 5-4 COMBINATION OF RUN AND ALM LED INDICATORS ............................ 5-3
Table 6-1 RNC interface board Selection ................................................................. 6-2
Table 6-2 LED INDICATORS ON APBE PANEL........................................................ 6-6
Table 6-3 BUTTONS ON APBE PANEL .................................................................... 6-7
Table 6-4 INTERFACE ON APBE PANEL ................................................................. 6-7
Table 6-5 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF APBE .................................................... 6-8
Table 6-6 APBE CPU Alarms .................................................................................... 6-9
Table 6-7 LED INDICATOR ON APBI PANEL.......................................................... 6-12
Table 6-8 BUTTON ON APBI PANEL ...................................................................... 6-12
Table 6-9 INTERFACE ON APBI PANEL................................................................. 6-13
Table 6-10 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF APBI ................................................. 6-13
VII
Table 6-11 APBI CPU Alarms.................................................................................. 6-14

Table 6-12 LED INDICATOR ON CLKG PANEL ...................................................... 6-16
Table 6-13 BUTTON ON CLKG PANEL .................................................................. 6-18
Table 6-14 DIP SWITCH ON CLKG PANEL ............................................................ 6-19
Table 6-15 INTERFACE ON CLKG PANEL ............................................................. 6-19
Table 6-16 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF CLKG................................................ 6-20
Table 6-17 CLKG CPU Alarms ................................................................................ 6-21
Table 6-18 DTA Board Panel Indicator ................................................................... 6-23
Table 6-19 DTA Board Panel Key ........................................................................... 6-23
Table 6-20 DTA Board Back Plane Connection ....................................................... 6-24
Table 6-21 DTA CPU Alarms................................................................................... 6-25
Table 6-22 LED INDICATOR ON DTB PANEL......................................................... 6-27
Table 6-23 BUTTON ON DTB PANEL ..................................................................... 6-27
Table 6-24 DIP SWITCH ON DTB PANEL............................................................... 6-28
Table 6-25 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF DTB .................................................. 6-29
Table 6-26 DTB CPU Alarms .................................................................................. 6-30
Table 6-27 DTI board panel Indicator ..................................................................... 6-31
Table 6-28 DTI Board Panel Key ............................................................................ 6-32
Table 6-29 DTI Board Back Plane Connection ........................................................ 6-33
Table 6-30 LED INDICATOR ON EIPI PANEL ......................................................... 6-35
Table 6-31
BUTTON ON EIPI PANEL .................................................................... 6-36
Table 6-32 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF EIPI................................................... 6-36

Table 6-33 EIPI CPU Alarms................................................................................... 6-37
Table 6-34 LED INDICATOR ON GIPI PANEL......................................................... 6-39
Table 6-35 BUTTON ON GIPI PANEL ..................................................................... 6-40
Table 6-36 INTERFACE ON GIPI PANEL................................................................ 6-40
Table 6-37 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF GIPI .................................................. 6-40
Table 6-38 GIPI CPU Alarms .................................................................................. 6-41
Table 6-39 GIPI3 board panel Indicator .................................................................. 6-43
Table 6-40 Buttons on GIPI3 Board Panel............................................................... 6-44
Table 6-41 Interfaces on GIPI3 board panel ............................................................ 6-44
Table 6-42 Backplane Connections on GIPI3 Board................................................ 6-44
Table 6-43 GIPI3 CPU Alarms ................................................................................ 6-45
Table 6-44 GIPI4 board panel Indicator ................................................................... 6-47
Table 6-45 Buttons on GIPI4 Board Panel............................................................... 6-48
VIII
Tables
Table 6-46 Interfaces on GIPI4 board panel ............................................................ 6-48

Table 6-47 Backplane Connections on GIPI4 Board................................................ 6-48
Table 6-48 GIPI4 CPU Alarms ................................................................................ 6-49
Table 6-49 LED INDICATOR ON GLI PANEL .......................................................... 6-51
Table 6-50 BUTTON ON GLI PANEL ...................................................................... 6-52
Table 6-51 INTERFACE ON GLI PANEL ................................................................. 6-53
Table 6-52 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF GLI.................................................... 6-53
Table 6-53 GLI CPU Alarms.................................................................................... 6-54
Table 6-54 LED INDICATOR ON GUIM PANEL ...................................................... 6-56
Table 6-55 BUTTON ON GUIM PANEL................................................................... 6-58
Table 6-56 INTERFACE ON GUIM PANEL ............................................................. 6-58
Table 6-57 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF GUIM ................................................ 6-59
Table 6-58 GUIM CPU Alarms ................................................................................ 6-60
Table 6-59 LED INDICATOR ON ICM PANEL ......................................................... 6-62
Table 6-60 BUTTONS ON ICM PANEL ................................................................... 6-64
Table 6-61 DIP SWITCHES ON ICM PANEL........................................................... 6-65
Table 6-62 INTERFACE ON ICM PANEL ................................................................ 6-66
Table 6-63 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF ICM ................................................... 6-66
Table 6-64 ICM CPU Alarms ................................................................................... 6-67
Table 6-65
LED INDICATOR ON ICMG PANEL ..................................................... 6-69
Table 6-66 BUTTON ON CLMG PANEL.................................................................. 6-71

Table 6-67 DIP SWITCH ON ICMG PANEL............................................................. 6-72
Table 6-68
INTERFACE ON ICMG PANEL............................................................. 6-72
Table 6-69 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF ICMG ................................................ 6-73

Table 6-70 ICMG CPU Alarms ................................................................................ 6-74
Table 6-71 LED INDICATOR ON IMAB PANEL ....................................................... 6-75
Table 6-72 BUTTON ON IMAB PANEL ................................................................... 6-76
Table 6-73 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF IMAB................................................. 6-76
Table 6-74 IMAB CPU Alarms ................................................................................. 6-77
Table 6-75 PWRD Board DIP Switches ................................................................... 6-78
Table 6-76 PWRD Board Interfaces ........................................................................ 6-79
Table 6-77 LED INDICATOR ON POSI PANEL ....................................................... 6-82
Table 6-78 BUTTON ON POSI PANEL.................................................................... 6-82
Table 6-79 INTERFACE ON POSI PANEL .............................................................. 6-82
Table 6-80 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF POSI ................................................. 6-83
IX
Table 6-81 LED INDICATOR ON PSN PANEL ........................................................ 6-85

Table 6-82 BUTTON ON PSN PANEL..................................................................... 6-86
Table 6-83 INTERFACE ON PSN PANEL ............................................................... 6-86
Table 6-84 PSN CPU Alarms .................................................................................. 6-87
Table 6-85 LED INDICATOR ON RCB PANEL ........................................................ 6-89
Table 6-86 BUTTON ON RCB PANEL..................................................................... 6-90
Table 6-87 DIP SWITCHES ON RCB PANEL.......................................................... 6-91
Table 6-88 JUMPERS ON RCB PANEL .................................................................. 6-91
Table 6-89 INTERFACE ON RCB PANEL ............................................................... 6-92
Table 6-90 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF RCB .................................................. 6-92
Table 6-91 RCB CPU Alarms .................................................................................. 6-93
Table 6-92 LED INDICATORS ON ROMB PANEL................................................... 6-95
Table 6-93 BUTTON ON ROMB PANEL ................................................................. 6-96
Table 6-94 DIP SWITCH ON ROMB PANEL ........................................................... 6-97
Table 6-95 JUMPER ON ROMB PANEL ................................................................. 6-98
Table 6-96 INTERFACE ON ROMB PANEL ............................................................ 6-98
Table 6-97 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF ROMB............................................... 6-99
Table 6-98 ROMB CPU Alarms ............................................................................. 6-100
Table 6-99 LED INDICATOR ON RUB PANEL ...................................................... 6-103
Table 6-100 BUTTON ON RUB PANEL................................................................. 6-104
Table 6-101 INTERFACE ON RUB PANEL (VTCD) .............................................. 6-104
Table 6-102 INTERFACE ON RUB PANEL (VTCD/2)............................................ 6-104
Table 6-103 RUB CPU Alarms .............................................................................. 6-105
Table 6-104 INDICES OF SBCX ........................................................................... 6-107
Table 6-105 LED INDICATOR ON SBCX PANEL .................................................. 6-108
Table 6-106 BUTTON ON SBCX PANEL .............................................................. 6-109
Table 6-107 INTERFACE ON SBCX PANEL ......................................................... 6-110
Table 6-108 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF SBCX ............................................ 6-110
Table 6-109 SBCX CPU Alarms .............................................................................6-111
Table 6-110 LED INDICATOR ON SDTA PANEL................................................... 6-113
Table 6-111 BUTTON ON SDTA PANEL ............................................................... 6-114
Table 6-112 INTERFACE ON SDTA PANEL.......................................................... 6-114
Table 6-113 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF SDTA............................................. 6-114
Table 6-114 SDTA CPU Alarms............................................................................. 6-115
Table 6-115 SDTA2 Board Panel Indicator ........................................................... 6-116
Tables
Table 6-116 SDTA2 Board Panel Keys .................................................................. 6-117

Table 6-117 SDTA2 Board Panel Interface ........................................................... 6-117
Table 6-118 SDTA2 Board Back Plane Connection ............................................... 6-118
Table 6-119 SDTA2 CPU Alarms........................................................................... 6-119
Table 6-120 LED INDICATOR ON SDTB2 PANEL ................................................ 6-121
Table 6-121 BUTTON ON SDTB PANEL............................................................... 6-122
Table 6-122 INTERFACE ON SDTB2 PANEL ....................................................... 6-122
Table 6-123 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF SDTB2 .......................................... 6-122
Table 6-124 SDTB2 CPU Alarms .......................................................................... 6-123
Table 6-125 SDTI Board Panel Indicator .............................................................. 6-125
Table 6-126 SDTI board panel key ....................................................................... 6-125
Table 6-127 SDTI board panel interface ............................................................... 6-125
Table 6-128 SDTI Board Back Plane Connection .................................................. 6-126
Table 6-129 SDTI CPU Alarms.............................................................................. 6-127
Table 6-130 LED INDICATOR ON THUB PANEL .................................................. 6-129
Table 6-131 BUTTON ON THUB PANEL .............................................................. 6-130
Table 6-132 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF THUB ............................................ 6-130
Table 6-133 THUB CPU Alarms ............................................................................ 6-131
Table 6-134 LED INDICATOR ON UIMC PANEL................................................... 6-134
Table 6-135 BUTTON ON UIMC PANEL ............................................................... 6-134
Table 6-136 BACKPLANE CONNECTION OF UIMC ............................................ 6-134
Table 6-137 UIMC CPU Alarms............................................................................. 6-136
Table 7-1 INTERFACE ON RCHB1 PANEL............................................................... 7-3
Table 7-2 INTERFACE ON RCHB2 PANEL............................................................... 7-5
Table 7-3 INTERFACE ON RCKG1 PANEL............................................................... 7-8
Table 7-4 INTERFACE ON RCKG2 PANEL............................................................. 7-10
Table 7-5 RDTA Board Panel Interface ................................................................... 7-12
Table 7-6 INTERFACE ON RDTB PANEL ............................................................... 7-13
Table 7-7 CONNECTION OF PINS X9~X1.............................................................. 7-14
Table 7-8 INTERFACE ON RGER PANEL .............................................................. 7-16
Table 7-9 INTERFACE ON RGIM1 PANEL ............................................................. 7-18
Table 7-10 INTERFACE ON RGUM1 PANEL .......................................................... 7-20
Table 7-11 INTERFACE ON RGUM2 PANEL .......................................................... 7-22
Table 7-12 INTERFACE ON RMNIC PANEL ........................................................... 7-24
Table 7-13 INTERFACE ON RMPB PANEL............................................................. 7-26
XI
Table 7-14 INTERFACE ON RSVB PANEL ............................................................. 7-28

Table 7-15 INTERFACE ON RUIM2 PANEL............................................................ 7-30
Table 7-16 INTERFACE ON RUIM3 PANEL............................................................ 7-32
Table 8-1 RELATION OF SHELF AND BACKPLANE ................................................ 8-2
Table 8-2 POWER INTERFACE ON BCTC ............................................................... 8-4
Table 8-3 BGSN OFFICE ID JUMPER SWITCH (X4)................................................ 8-4
Table 8-4 BGSN RACK ID JUMPER SWITCH (X5)................................................... 8-4
Table 8-5 BGSN SHELF ID JUMPER SWITCH (X6) ................................................. 8-4
Table 8-6 POWER INTERFACE ON BGSN............................................................... 8-6
Table 8-7 BGSN OFFICE ID JUMPER SWITCH (X4)................................................ 8-6
Table 8-8 BGSN RACK ID JUMPER SWITCH (X5)................................................... 8-6
Table 8-9 BGSN SHELF ID JUMPER SWITCH (X6) ................................................. 8-6
Table 8-10 POWER INTERFACE ON BPSN ............................................................. 8-8
Table 8-11 BPSN OFFICE ID JUMPER SWITCH (X4) .............................................. 8-8
Table 8-12 BPSN RACK ID JUMPER SWITCH (X5) ................................................. 8-8
Table 8-13 BPSN SHELF ID JUMPER SWITCH (X6)................................................ 8-8
Table 8-14 DIP SWITCHES ON RBID BACKPLANE............................................... 8-10
Table 9-1
External Power Cable Signal Explanation ................................................ 9-2
Table 9-2
Fan Shelf Power Cable Wiring Diagram ................................................... 9-3
Table 9-3
Fan Subrack Power Cable Wiring Diagram .............................................. 9-4
Table 9-4 Wiring Diagram of the Power Cable .......................................................... 9-5

Table 9-5 Wiring Diagram of Internal Power Cable ................................................... 9-5
Table 9-6 Line Clock Cable Conductors Relation ..................................................... 9-7
Table 9-7 BITS Clock Cable (120) Conductors Relation ......................................... 9-8
Table 9-8 BITS Clock Cable (75) Cable Conductors Relation ................................ 9-9
Table 9-9 The Conductors Relation of System Clock Distribution Cable ................. 9-10
Table 9-10 THUB Cable Conductors Relation ........................................................ 9-13
Table 9-11 Cable Conductor's Relation .................................................................. 9-15
Table 9-12 The Wiring Diagram of the Shielded Straigt-Through Cable .................. 9-16
Table 9-13 Pin Definition of External E1 Cable (75) .............................................. 9-17
Table 9-14 Pin Definition of External E1 Cable (120) ............................................ 9-19
Table 9-15 External T1 Cable (100 Unshielded) Conductors Relation .................. 9-21
Table 9-16 External T1 cable (100 shielded) Conductors Relation ........................ 9-22
Table 9-17
Environment Monitor Adaptor Cable Conductors Relation ................... 9-24
Table 9-18
Rack Front/Rear Door Access Control Cable Conductors Relation

.............................................................................................................. 9-26
XII
Tables
Table 9-19
Machine Room Access Control Sensor Cable Conductors Relation

.............................................................................................................. 9-26
Table 9-20
IR Sensor Cable Conductors Relation ................................................. 9-27
Table 9-21
smoke sensor cable conductors relation .............................................. 9-28
Table 9-22
H/T Sensor Cable Conductor'S Relation .............................................. 9-29
Table 10-1 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF GPS ACTIVE ANTENNA...................... 10-3

Table 10-2 TECHNICAL PARAMETER OF LIGHTENING ARRESTER ................... 10-3
Table 11-1 CABLE CONNECTIONS for SINGLE-RACK CONFIGURATION............ 11-5
Table 11-2 CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR DUAL-RACK CONFIGURATION ............ 11-6
Table 11-3 CABLE CONNECTIONS FOR TRIPLE-RACK
CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 11-10
Table 11-4 External Signal Cable Connections for Typical Configurations ............. 11-18
Table 12-1 RELATION OF SHELF AND BACKPLANE ............................................ 12-1
Table 12-2 LEGEND OF APPARATUS.................................................................. 12-10
XIII
Tables
Glossary
AAL2
- ATM Adaptation Layer type 2
AAL5
- ATM Adaptation Layer type 5
AGPS
- Assisted Global Positioning System
APBE
- ATM Process Board Enhanced version
APBI
- ATM Process Board with IMA
APS
- Automatic Protection Switching
ATM
- Asynchronous Transfer Mode
BCTC
- Backplane of ConTrol Center
BGSN
- Backplane of Giga universal Service Network
BPSN
- Backplane of Packet Switch Network
CLKG
- CLOCK Generator
CN
- Core Network
CPU
- Central Processing Unit
CS
- Circuit Switched
DSP
- Digital Signal Processor
DTA
- Digital Trunk Board (ATM)
DTB
- Digital Trunk Board
XV
DTI
- Digital Trunk Board IP version
EIPI
- E1 IP Interface
EMC
- Electromagnetic Compatibility
FE
- Fast Ethernet
FP
- Frame Protocol
FPGA
- Field Programmable Gate Array
GE
- Gigabit Ethernet
GIPI
- GE IP Interface
GIPI3
- Gigabit IP Interface 3
GIPI4
- Gigabit IP Interface 4
GLI
- Gigabit Line Interface
GPS
- Global Positioning System
GTP-U
- GTP User Plane
GUIM
- Gigabit Universal Interface Module
HW
- High speed data Way
ICM
- Integrated Clock Module
ICMG
- Integrated Clock Module (GPS)
IMA
- Inverse Multiplexing over ATM
IMAB
- IMA Board
XVI
Glossary
IP
- Internet Protocol
IUUP
- Iu User Plane
LED
- Light Emitting Diode
LMT
- Local Maintenance Terminal
MAC
- Medium Access Control
OMC
- Operation & Maintenance Center
OMCB
- Operation & Maintenance Center for Node B
OMCR
- Operations & Maintenance CenterRadio
OMP
- Operation & Maintenance Processor
OS
- Operating System
PCB
- Printed Circuit Board
PDCP
- Packet Data Convergence Protocol
PE
- Protective Earth
POS
- Packet Over SONET/SDH
POSI
- POS Interface Board
PS
- Packet Switched
PSN
- Packet Switched Network
PWRD
- PoWeR Distributor
RAID
- Redundant Array of Independent Disks
XVII
RBID
- Rear Board of ID
RCB
- RNC Control plane Board
RCHB1
- Rear Board 1 of CHUB
RCHB2
- Rear Board 2 of CHUB
RCKG1
- Rear Board 1 of CLKG
RCKG2
- Rear Board 2 of CLKG
RDTA
- Rear Board of DTA
RDTB
- Rear Board of DTB
RF
- Radio Frequency
RGER
- Rear Giga Ethernet Board of Resource
RGIM1
- General Rear Interface Module 1
RGUM1
- Rear Board of Gigabit Universal interface Module 1
RGUM2
- Rear Board of Gigabit Universal interface Module 2
RLC
- Radio Link Control
RMNIC
- Rear Board of MNIC
RMPB
- Rear Board of MPB
RNC
- Radio Network Controller
RNS
- Radio Network Subsystem
ROMB
- RNC Operation & Maintenance Board
XVIII
Glossary
RPU
- Route Protocol Unit
RSVB
- Rearcard of SerVe Board
RTCP
- Real-time Transport Control Protocol
RTP
- Real-time Transport Protocol
RUB
- RNC User Plane Board
RUIM2
- Rear board of UIM (type2)
RUIM3
- Rear board of UIM (type3)
SBCX
- X86 Single Board Computer
SDTA
- SONET Digital Trunk Board (ATM)
SDTA2
- Sonet Digital Trunk Board ATM version 2
SDTB2
- Sonet Digital Trunk Board 2
SDTI
- Sonet Digital Trunk Board IP version
STM
- Synchronous Transfer Mode
TDM
- Time Division Multiplexing
THUB
- Trunk HUB
UIMC
- Universal Interface Module for Control plane (BCTC or BPSN)
XIX

SJ-20100603155704-008-ZXWR RNC (V3.09.30) Hardware Description - 322356

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SJ-20100603155704-008-ZXWR RNC (V3.09.30) Hardware Description - 322356

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ZXWR RNC

Radio Network Controller

Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by

contractual confidentiality obligations.

First Edition (V3.09.30.03)

Update the information in shelf and front board such as changing

Update size of Cabinete Appearance

1. Add illustration, ability ,detailed function decripiton for the

2. Add Boards CPU Alarm Informations for the following cards:

The following sections have been added:

The following topics have been modified:

The following sections have been modified:

Second Edition (V3.09.30.06)

The following sections have been modified:

The following section has been modified:

The following sections have been modified:

Serial Number: SJ-20100603155704-008

Chapter 2 Subrack...................................................................................... 2-1

2.7 Service Subrack ................................................................................................. 2-8

Chapter 3 Shelf ........................................................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4 Board.......................................................................................... 4-1

Chapter 5 Indicators................................................................................... 5-1

Chapter 6 Front Boards ............................................................................. 6-1

6.3.9 Configuration Requirements...................................................................... 6-8

6.6.7 DTA Board Back Plane Connection ......................................................... 6-24

6.9.8 Configuration Requirements.................................................................... 6-36

6.12.9 Reliability ............................................................................................. 6-49

6.15.10 Configuration Requirements ................................................................ 6-66

6.18.7 PWRD Board Configuration Requirements ............................................. 6-80

6.22.1 ROMB Board Definition ........................................................................ 6-93

6.25 SDTA Board.................................................................................................. 6-112

6.28.1 SDTI Board Definition .........................................................................6-123

Chapter 7 Rear Boards............................................................................... 7-1

7.2 RCHB1 Board .................................................................................................... 7-2

7.7.1 RDTB Board Definition .......................................................................... 7-12

7.12.2 Functions............................................................................................. 7-23

Chapter 8 Backplane .................................................................................. 8-1

8.4 Relation of Shelf and Backplane.......................................................................... 8-2

Chapter 9 Cables ........................................................................................ 9-1

9.3 Cabinet Grounding Cable ................................................................................... 9-6

Chapter 10 Other Devices and Accessories .......................................... 10-1

Chapter 11 System Configuration Description ...................................... 11-1

11.2 Double-Rack Full Configuration of ZXWR RNC..................................................11-2

Chapter 12 Hardware Quick Reference .................................................. 12-1

What is in This Manual

Introduces the function, structure, panel and technical parameters

Introduces the function classification, configuration, structure,

Introduces name, classification and signal flow of ZXWR RNC

Introduces the LED indicators on the front board.

Chapter 6, Front Boards

Introduces the front boards of ZXWR RNC.

Chapter 7, Rear Boards

Introduces the rear boards of ZXWR RNC.

Introduces the functions, classifications, and configurations of

Chapter 9, Other Devices and

Introduces the switch, GPS antenna lightening arrester, GPS

antenna, including their model, function, connection, front/rear

Chapter 10, System

Introduces the hardware resource configuration of ZXWR RNC

and details the typical configurations.

Appendix A, Hardware Quick

Give a quick reference of ZXWR RNC hardware.

1.2 Cabinet Appearance